HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL - 22-00332 - Rexburg FM Office - RemodelPROJECT MANUAL
For the Construction of:
Remodel Serving Area into Restroom
Rexburg FM Office
Rexburg Idaho Stake
Rexburg , Idaho
May 2022
990 John Adams Parkway, P.O. Box 2212, Idaho Falls, Idaho 83403 -2212
Telephone:(208) 522 -877 9 /Fax:(208) 52 2 -8 785/Email:nbw@ nbwarchitects.com
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Project Manual
for
Remodel Serving Area into Restroom
Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Rexburg FM Office
Rexburg, Idaho
Church Property/Project Number #511306721010103
Architect Project #21013
May 2022
Architect NBW Architects, P.A.
990 John Adams Parkway
P.O. Box 2212
Idaho Falls, ID 83403-2212
Telephone: 208-522-8779
E-Mail: cjr@nbwarchitects.com
Mechanical Engineer: Engineered Systems Associates
1355 East Center
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
Telephone: 208-233-0501
E-Mail: dwayne@engsystems.com
Electrical Engineer Payne Engineering Inc.
1823 East Center
Idaho Falls, Idaho
(208) 232-4439
E-Mail: pei@cableone.net
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Introductory Information
I N T R O D U C T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Introductory Information
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Table of Contents - 1 - Document 00 0110
T A B L E o f C O N T E N T S
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
D I V I S I 0 N 00: P R O C U R E M E N T A N D C O N T R A C T I N G R E Q U I R E M E N T S
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP
00 1000 S O L I C I T A T I O N
INVITATION TO BID
00 2000 I N S T R U C T I O N S FOR P R O C U R E M E N T
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00 4000 P R O C U R E M E N T F O R M S AND S U P P L E M E N T S
BID FORM
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ASBESTOS STATEMENT
00 4500 R E P R E S E N T A T I O N S AND C E R T I F I C A T I O N S
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ASBESTOS REPRESENTATION
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP
00 5000 C O N T R A C T I N G F O R M S AND S U P P L E M E N T S T
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR A FIXED SUM (US)
00 7000 C O N D I T I O N S O F T H E C O N T R A C T
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FIXED SUM (US)
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP
D I V I S I 0 N 01: G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S
01 1000 SUMMARY
01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS
01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4301 QUALITY ASSURANCE – QUALIFICATIONS
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Table of Contents - 2 - Document 00 0110
01 4523 TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES
01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 6100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS
01 6400 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
01 6600 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
01 7000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01 7400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP
D I V I S I O N 02: E X I S T I N G C O N D I T I O N S
02 4000 D E M O L I T I O N A N D S T R U C T U R E M O V I N G
03 1113 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
D I V I S I O N 03: C O N C R E T E
03 3000 C A S T - I N - P L A C E C O N C R E T E
03 3111 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
D I V I S I O N 06: W O O D, P L A S T I C S, A N D C O M P O S I T E S
06 1000 R O U G H C A R P E N T R Y
06 1011 WOOD FASTENINGS
06 1100 WOOD FRAMING
06 2000 F I N I S H C A R P E N T R Y
06 2024 DOOR, FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION
06 2210 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM
06 4000 A R C H I T E C T U R A L W O O D W O R K
06 4512 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM
D I V I S I O N 07: T H E R M A L A N D M O I S T U R E P R O T E C T I O N
07 2000 T H E R M A L P R O T E C T I O N
07 2116 BLANKET INSULATION
07 9000 J O I N T P R O T E C T I O N
07 9213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
D I V I S I O N 0 8: O P E N I N G S
08 1000 D O O R S A N D F R A M E S
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Table of Contents - 3 - Document 00 0110
08 1213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 7000 H A R D W A R E
08 7101 COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
08 7102 HANGING DEVICES
08 7103 SECURING DEVICES
08 7106 CLOSING DEVICES
08 7108 STOPS AND HOLDERS
08 7109 ACCESSORIES
D I V I S I O N 09: F I N I S H E S
09 2000 P L A S T E R A N D G Y P S U M B O A R D
09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD
09 3000 T I L I N G
09 3013 CERAMIC TILING
09 9000 P A I N T S A N D C O A T I N G S
09 9001 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS
09 9122 INTERIOR PAINTED CMU
09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER
09 9125 INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD
09 9324 INTERIOR CLEAR-FINISHED HARDWOOD
09 9413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING
D I V I S I O N 10: S P E C I A L T I E S
10 2000 I N T E R I O R S P E C I A L T I E S
10 2813 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP
D I V I S I O N 22: P L U M B I N G
22 0500 C O M M O N W O R K R E S U L T S F O R P L U M B I N G
22 0501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT
22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 1000 P L U M B I N G P I P E S A N D P U M P S
22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1313 FACILITY SEWERS
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Table of Contents - 4 - Document 00 0110
22 1319 FACILITY SANITARY SEWER SPECIALTIES
22 4000 P L U M B I N G F I X T U R E S
22 4213 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
22 4216 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
D I V I S I O N 23: H E A T I N G, V E N T I L A T I N G, A N D A I R - C O N D I T I O N I N G
23 0500 C O M M O N W O R K R E S U L T S F O R H V A C
23 0501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS
23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 3000 H V A C A I R D I S T R I B U T I O N
23 3001 COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS
23 3114 LOW-PRESSURE METAL DUCTS
23 3401 EXHAUST FANS
23 8000 D E C E N T R A L I Z E D H V A C E Q U I P M E N T
23 8333 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS
D I V I S I O N 24 - 25: NOT USED
D I V I S I O N 26: E L E C T R I C A L (SEE DRAWINGS)
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
LIST OF DRAWINGS
ARCHITECTURAL
TS1.1 Title Sheet, Index & Key Plan
A1.1 Demolition and Construction Floor and Ceiling Plans
A2.1 Interior Elevations, Schedules, and Details
F1.1 Signage & Furnishing Plans and Schedules
MECHANICAL
M1.1 Mechanical and Plumbing Demolition and Floor Plans
M1.2 Mechanical and Plumbing Schedules
ELECTRICAL
E0.0 Electrical Drawings
B L A N K P A G E
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 1 of 11
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
FOR SMALL PROJECTS (U.S.)
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 2 of 11
BLANK PAGE
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 3 of 11
INVITATION TO BID (U.S.)
1. CONTRACTORS INVITED TO BID THE PROJECT:
TBD
2. PROJECT:
Rexburg FM Office Restroom
3. LOCATION:
434 East 2nd North
Rexburg, ID 83408
4. OWNER:
The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, a Utah corporation sole
c/o
434 East 2nd North
Rexburg, ID 83408
5. CONSULTANT:
NBW Architects, P.A.
990 John Adams Parkway
P.O. Box 2212
Idaho Falls, Idaho 83403
6. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT:
A. Conversion of serving area room into two separate, single use toilet rooms. Includes the
replacement of finishes and new plumbing fixtures.
B. Products or systems may be provided under a Value Managed Relationship (VMR) the
Owner has negotiated with the supplier. VMR products and systems are indicated as such in
the Specifications.
7. TYPE OF BID: Bids will be on a lump-sum basis. Segregated bids will not be accepted.
8. TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: The time limit for substantial completion of this work will
be 45 calendar days and will be as noted in the Agreement.
9. BID OPENING: Sealed bids will be received at (time and date at place). Bids will be publicly
opened at (time and date at place).
10. BIDDING DOCUMENTS:
A. Bidding Documents may be examined at the following plan room locations:
1) Consultant Website - www.nbwarchitects.com under "Current Bidding Projects"
2)
B. Bidding Documents are available to invited Contractors with a deposit of $50.00 per set.
Deposit will be refunded if documents are returned complete and in good condition within five
days of bid opening.
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 4 of 11
11. BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS:Bidding by the Contractors will be by invitation only.
12. OWNER’S RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS: Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to
waive any irregularity therein.
END OF DOCUMENT
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 5 of 11
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (U.S.)
1. DOCUMENTS:
A. Bidding Documents include Bidding Requirements and proposed Contract Documents.
Proposed Contract Documents consist of:
1) Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Small Project (U.S.)
2) Other documents included by reference
3) Addenda.
B. Bidding Requirements are those documents identified as such in proposed Project Manual.
C. Addenda are written or graphic documents issued prior to execution of the Contract which
modify or interpret the Bidding Documents. They become part of the Contract Documents
as noted in the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Small Project (U.S.) upon
execution of the Agreement by Owner.
2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS:
A. By submitting a bid proposal, bidder represents that
1) Bidder has carefully studied and compared Bidding Documents with each other.
Bidder understands the Bidding Documents and the bid is fully in accordance with the
requirements of those documents,
2) Bidder has thoroughly examined the site and any building located thereon, has
become familiar with local conditions which might directly or indirectly affect contract
work, and has correlated its personal observations with requirements of proposed
Contract Documents, and
3) Bid is based on materials, equipment, and systems required by Bidding Documents
without exception.
3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS:
A. Copies
1) Owner will provide the Bidding Documents as set forth in the Invitation to Bid.
2) Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be issued.
B. Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents
1) Bidders will request interpretation or correction of any apparent errors, discrepancies,
and omissions in the Bidding Documents.
2) Corrections or changes to Bidding Documents will be made by written Addenda.
C. Substitutions and Equal Products
1) Equal products may be approved upon compliance with Contract Document
requirements.
2) Base bid only on materials, equipment, systems, suppliers or performance qualities
specified in the Bidding documents.
3) Where a specified product is identified as a "quality standard", products of other
manufacturers that meet the performance, properties, and characteristics of the
specified "quality standard" may be used without specific approval as a substitute.
D. Addenda. Addenda will be sent to bidders and to locations where Bidding Documents are on
file no later than one week prior to bid opening or by fax no later than 48 hours prior to bid
opening.
4. BIDDING PROCEDURES:
A. Form and Style of Bids
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 6 of 11
1) Use Owner’s Bid Form.
2) Bid will be complete and executed by authorized representative of Bidder.
3) Do not delete from or add to the information requested on bid form.
B. Submission of Bids
1) Submit bid in sealed opaque envelope containing only bid form.
2) It is bidder's sole responsibility to see that its bid is received at or before the specified
time. Bids received after specified bid opening time may be returned to bidders
unopened.
3) No oral, facsimile transmitted, telegraphic, or telephonic bids, modifications, or
cancellations will be considered.
C. Modification or Withdrawal of Bid
1) Bidder guarantees there will be no revisions or withdrawal of bid amount for 45 days
after bid opening.
2) Prior to bid opening, bidders may withdraw bid by written request or by reclaiming bid
envelope.
3) Prior to bid opening, bidder may mark and sign on the sealed envelope that bidder
acknowledges any or all Addenda.
5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS:
A. Opening Of Bids - See Invitation to Bid.
B. Acceptance Of Bid
1) No bidder will consider itself under contract after opening and reading of bids until
Owner accepts Contractor’s Bid Proposal by executing same.
2) Bidder's past performance, organization, subcontractor selection, equipment, and
ability to perform and complete its contract in manner and within time specified,
together with amount of bid, will be elements considered in award of contract.
6. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR:
A. Agreement form will be “Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Small Project (U.S.)”
provided by Owner.
7. MISCELLANEOUS:
A. Pre-Bid Conference. A pre-bid conference may be held at a time and place to be
announced.
B. Examination Schedule for Existing Building and Site
1) To Be Determined
END OF DOCUMENT
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 7 of 11
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS (U.S.)
1. GEOTECHNICAL DATA
A. Geotechnical Report -
1) Owner has secured the services of a geotechnical engineer to aid in design of the
Project. Following conditions apply -
a) A geotechnical report has been prepared by , referred to as the
Geotechnical Engineer.
b) A copy of this report will be issued to each invited Contractor.
c) This report was obtained solely for use in design by Consultant and is not a part
of the Contract Documents. It is not intended that Contractor rely on
geotechnical engineer's report.
d) Reports are provided for Contractor's information but are not a warranty of
subsurface conditions.
2) Prior to bidding, Contractor may make his own subsurface investigations to satisfy
himself with site and subsurface conditions.
2. ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL (ACM)
A. The building upon which work is being performed has been examined for asbestos-
containing material. The following have been identified as containing asbestos in the areas
of the building being worked on as part of this Project:
1)
B. Refer to Section , Article for requirements to be followed.
END OF DOCUMENT
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 8 of 11
BLANK PAGE
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 9 of 11
BID FORM
FOR GENERAL CONTRACT WORK (U.S.)
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:
Remodel Serving Area into Restroom
Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Rexburg Idaho Stake
OWNER:
The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, a Utah corporation sole (“Owner”)
Jeff Wheeler Rexburg Idaho Facilities Manager
434 East 2nd North
Rexburg, ID 83408
CONSULTANT:
NBW Architects, P.A.
990 John Adams Parkway
P.O. Box 2212
Idaho Falls, Idaho 83403
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
BID
1. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:
a. If this Bid is accepted, Bidder will enter into an agreement with Owner to perform and furnish the Work
described in the Bidding Documents for the Bid Price and within the Time of Substantial Completion indicated
in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
b. Bidder has carefully examined the Bidding Documents consisting of the Project Manual containing the Bidding
Requirements, the Conditions of the Contract, and the Specifications, entitled
____________________________, the Drawings entitled _____________________________________ and
dated _________________________, and including sheets numbered ___________________________, and
addenda numbers _______________.
c. Bidder has examined the site of the work, existing conditions, and all other conditions affecting the work on the
above-named Project.
d. Bidder has carefully correlated the information known to Bidder and information and observations obtained
from visits to the site with the Bidding Documents.
e. Bidder is familiar with federal, State, and local laws and regulations applicable to Project.
f. Bidder guarantees there will be no revisions or withdrawal of bid amount for forty-five (45) days after the bid
opening.
2. Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportations, services, licenses, fees,
permits, etc., required by said documents to complete the Work described by the Contract Documents for the
lump-sum of: ______________________________________________ Dollars ($ ________________________).
3. Bidder agrees to achieve substantial completion of the Work within the number of days indicated in the Invitation
to Bid.
RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED:
Signature
Printed name
Title
Company name
Business Address
_______________
Date City, State, and Zip Code
_______________
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 10 of 11
License No. Telephone Fax
Contact Email Address
BLANK PAGE
Bidding Requirements for Small Projects US 190904 Page 11 of 11
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ASBESTOS STATEMENT (U.S.)
PROJECTS FOR:
THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS,
a Utah corporation sole
Building Name:
Building Plan Type:
Building Address:
Building Owner: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, a Utah corporation sole.
Project Number:
Completion Date:
As PROJECT CONSULTANT and principal in charge; based on my best knowledge, information,
inspection, and belief; I certify that on the above referenced Project, no asbestos-containing building
materials were specified in the construction documents or given approval in shop drawings or submittals.
Project Consultant and Principal in Charge (signature)Date
Company Name
As GENERAL CONTRACTOR in charge of construction; based on my best knowledge, information,
inspection, and belief; I affirm that on the above-referenced Project, no asbestos-containing building
materials were used in the construction.
General Contractor (signature)Date
Company Name
Sa
m
p
l
e
Fo
r
m
of
Ag
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor US 190620 Page 1 of 7
SMALL PROJECT AGREEMENT
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
Fixed Sum (U.S.)
The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, a Utah corporation sole (“Owner”) and (“Contractor”) enter
into this Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (U.S.) (“Agreement”) and agree as follows:
1.Property/Project.
Property/Project Number:
Property Address (“Project Site”):
Project Type:
Project Name (“Project”):
Stake Name:
2.Scope of Work. Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to complete the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Work is all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
construction, and services required by the Contract Documents (the “Work”).
3.Contract Documents. Contract Documents consist of:
a.This Agreement;
b.Supplementary Conditions for Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (U.S.);
c.The Specifications (Division 01 and Divisions );
d.Drawings entitled and dated ;
e.Addendum No. with date(s);
g.All written Field Changes, written Construction Change Directives and written Change Orders when
prepared and signed by Owner and Contractor.
4.Compensation. Owner will pay Contractor for performance of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract
Documents the sum of Dollars ($ ) (the “Contract Sum”). This Contract Sum includes all labor,
materials, equipment, tools, costs, expenses, work and services of Contractor and its subcontractors
necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, including without limitation
travel, communications, and copying costs.
5.Payment.
a.If the Contract Sum is over $100,000 or if otherwise requested by Owner, Contractor will submit to Owner
a schedule of values which allocates the Contractor’s Bid Proposal Amount to various portions of the
Work. This schedule, when accepted by Owner will be used as a basis for reviewing Contractor’s
payment requests.
b.Not more than once each month, Contractor will submit a payment request to Owner. Owner will pay
Contractor for work completed within thirty (30) days after Owner receives:
1)Contractor’s payment request for work to date;
2)a certification by Contractor that Contractor has paid for all labor, materials, and equipment relating to
the Work covered by prior payment requests and that Contractor will pay for all labor, materials, and
equipment relating to the Work covered by the current payment request; and
3)releases of all mechanics’ liens and claims of subcontractors, laborers, or material suppliers who
supplied labor and/or materials for the Work covered by the payment request.
4)updated Construction Schedule.
c.Owner may modify or reject the payment request if, in Owner’s opinion, the Work for which payment is
requested is not acceptable or is less complete than represented on the payment request.
d.Contractor will timely pay subcontractors their portion of fees and expenses that Owner has paid to
Contractor.
Sa
m
p
l
e
Fo
r
m
of
Ag
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor US 190620 Page 2 of 7
6. Extras and Change Orders. Owner may order changes in the Work by altering, adding to, or deducting from
the Work. In the event of such a change, the Contract Sum and/or the time of completion will be adjusted to
reflect the change by means of a written Change Order signed by Contractor and Owner. Contractor will not
commence work on any change until either: (a) Contractor and Owner have executed a Change Order; or (b)
Owner has issued a written order for the change acknowledging that there is a dispute regarding the
compensation adjustment relating to the change. If Contractor proceeds with a change in the Work without
complying with the preceding sentence, Contractor agrees that it will not be entitled to any additional
compensation for such change.
7. Warranty and Correction of Work. For all Work, services, labor, materials, products, and equipment
provided under the Contract Documents, Contractor provides and extends to Owner all statutory, common
law, and standard industry warranties as well as those warranties set forth in Owner’s Contract Documents.
Unless a longer period is specified by Owner’s Contract Documents or otherwise, Contractor, at a minimum
and in addition to all other warranties, warrants all Work under the Contract Documents for at least one year.
Specifically, and without limitation, Contractor will promptly correct at its own expense:
a. any portion of the Work which
1) fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or
2) is rejected by the Owner as defective or because it is damaged or rendered unsuitable during
installation or resulting from failure to exercise proper protection.
b. any defects due to faulty materials, equipment, or workmanship which appear within a period of one year
from the date of completion of the Work or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law
or the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents.
8. Time of Completion. Contractor will complete the Work and have it ready for Owner’s inspection within
( ) calendar days from Notice to Proceed issued by Owner. Time is of the essence. If Contractor
is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of Owner, or by changes in the Work,
or by strikes, lockouts, unusual delay in transportation, unavoidable casualties, or acts of nature beyond
Contractor’s control, then the time for completion will be extended by the time that completion of the Work is
delayed. However, Contractor expressly waives any damages for any such delays.
9. Owner Provided Items. Owner may provide furnishings, equipment, and/or other items for the Project.
Contractor will install items furnished by Owner and/or receive, store, and protect such items on site until the
date Owner accepts the Project.
10. Product Requirements. Contractor will provide products that comply with Contract Documents, are
undamaged, and, unless otherwise indicated, are new and unused at time of installation. Contractor will provide
products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for
complete installation and for intended use and effect.
11. Permits, Surveys, and Taxes. Contractor will obtain and pay for all permits and licenses, and also pay any
applicable taxes. Contractor will also obtain and pay for any surveys it needs to perform the Work.
12. Independent Contractor Relationship. Contractor is not an agent or employee of Owner but is an
independent contractor.
13. Comply with Laws. Contractor will comply, and ensure that all subcontractors comply, with all applicable
laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, covenants, and restrictions.
14. Indemnity and Hold Harmless.
a. Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Owner's representatives, employees, agents,
architects, and consultants from and against any and all claims, liens, damages, liability, demands, costs,
judgments, awards, settlements, causes of action, losses and expenses (collectively “Claims” or “Claim”),
including but not limited to attorney fees, consultant fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses,
arising out of or resulting from performance of or failure to perform the Work, attributable to bodily injury,
Sa
m
p
l
e
Fo
r
m
of
Ag
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor US 190620 Page 3 of 7
sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of real or personal property, including loss of use
resulting therefrom, except to the extent that such liability arises out of the negligence of Owner, its
representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity includes, without limitation, indemnification of
Owner from all losses or injury to Owner’s property, except to the extent that such loss or injury arises out
of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity applies, without
limitation, to include Claims occurring both during performance of the Work and/or subsequent to
completion of the Work. In the event that any Claim is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder,
that party will bear the cost of such Claim to the extent it was the cause thereof. In the event that a
claimant asserts a Claim for recovery against any party indemnified hereunder, the party indemnified
hereunder may tender the defense of such Claim to Contractor. If Contractor rejects such tender of
defense and it is later determined that the negligence of the party indemnified hereunder did not cause all
of the Claim, Contractor will reimburse the party indemnified hereunder for all costs and expenses
incurred by that party in defending against the Claim. Contractor will not be liable hereunder to indemnify
any party for damages resulting from the sole negligence of that party.
b. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will be liable to defend Owner in any lawsuit filed by any Subcon-
tractor relating to the Project. Where liens have been filed against Owner's property, Contractor (and/or
its bonding company which has issued bonds for the Project) will obtain lien releases and record them in
the appropriate county and/or local jurisdiction and provide Owner with a title free and clear from any liens
of Subcontractors. In the event that Contractor and/or its bonding company are unable to obtain a lien
release, Owner in its absolute discretion may require Contractor to provide a bond around the lien or a
bond to discharge the lien, at Contractor's sole expense.
c. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any claim of any
other contractor resulting from the performance, nonperformance or delay in performance of the Work by
Contractor.
d. The indemnification obligation herein will not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers compensation
acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
15. Work Restrictions. Contractor will ensure that Contractor, its agents, employees, and subcontractors:
a. Do not use or consume alcohol or cannabis, or illegally use drugs, on the Project Site or enter on or
perform any Work on the Project Site while under their influence.
b. Do not smoke or vape anything on the Project Site. Do not use tobacco in any form on the Project Site.
c. Do not perform Work on the Project Site on Sundays except for emergency work.
d. Refrain from using profanity or being discourteous or uncivil to others on the Project Site or while
performing Work under this Agreement.
e. Do not view or allow pornographic or other indecent materials on the Project Site.
f. Do not play obnoxious and/or loud music on the Project Site. Do not play any music within existing
facilities.
g. Refrain from wearing immodest, offensive, or obnoxious clothing, while on the Project Site.
h. Do not bring weapons on the Project Site.
16. Safety Hazards. Contractor will ensure that no work or services will be performed that may pose an undue
safety hazard to Contractor, Contractor’s employees, or any other person.
17. Contractor’s Insurance. Prior to performing any work, Contractor will obtain and maintain during the term of
this Agreement the following insurance:
a. Workers Compensation Insurance or evidence of exemption.
b. Employers Liability Insurance with minimum limits of the greater of $500,000 E.L. each accident, $500,000
E. L. disease-each employee, $500,000 E.L. disease-policy limit or as required by the law of the state in
which the Project is located.
c. Commercial General Liability Insurance – ISO Form CG 00 01 (12/07) or equivalent Occurrence policy
which will provide primary coverage to the additional insureds (the Owner and the Architect) in the event of
any Occurrence, Claim, or Suit with:
1) Limits of the greater of: Contractor’s actual coverage amounts or the following:
Sa
m
p
l
e
Fo
r
m
of
Ag
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor US 190620 Page 4 of 7
a) $2,000,000 General Aggregate;
b) $2,000,000 Products - Comp/Ops Aggregate;
c) $1,000,000 Personal and Advertising Liability;
d) $1,000,000 Each Occurrence; and
e) $50,000 Fire Damage to Rented Premises (Each Occurrence)
2) Endorsements attached to the General Liability policy including the following or their equivalent:
a) ISO Form CG-25-03 (05/09), Amendment of Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or Premises)
describing the Agreement and specifying limits as shown above.
b) ISO Form CG 20 10 (07/04), Additional Insured – Owners, Lessees, Or Contractors (Form B),
naming Owner and Architect as additional insureds.
d. Automobile Liability Insurance, with:
1) Combined Single Limit each accident in the amount of no less than $500,000; and
2) Coverage applying to "Any Auto" or its equivalent.
Contractor will provide evidence of these insurance coverages to Owner by providing an ACORD 25
(2010/05) Form or its equivalent: (1) listing Owner as the Certificate Holder and Additional Insured on the
general liability and any excess liability policies, (2) listing the insurance companies providing coverage (all
companies listed must be rated in A.M. Best Company Key Rating Guide-Property-Casualty and each
company must have a rating of B+ Class VII or higher), (3) attaching the endorsements set forth above for the
Certificate of Liability Insurance, and (4) bearing the name, address and telephone number of the producer
and signed by an authorized representative of the producer. (The signature may be original, stamped, or
electronic.) Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner may, in writing and at its sole discretion, modify these
insurance requirements.
18. Resolution of Disputes. In the event there is any dispute arising under the Contract Documents which
cannot be resolved by agreement between the parties, either party may submit the dispute with all
documentation upon which it relies to Director of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction, 50 East North
Temple, Salt Lake City, Utah 84150, who will convene a dispute resolution conference within thirty (30) days.
The dispute resolution conference will constitute settlement negotiations and any settlement proposal made
pursuant to the conference will not be admissible as evidence of liability. In the event that the parties do not
resolve their dispute pursuant to the dispute resolution conference, either party may commence legal action to
resolve the dispute. Any such action must be commenced within six (6) months from the first day of the
dispute resolution conference or be time barred. Submission of the dispute to the Director as outlined above
is a condition precedent to the right to commence legal action to resolve any dispute. In the event that either
party commences legal action to adjudicate any dispute without first submitting the dispute to the Director, the
other party will be entitled to obtain an order dismissing the litigation without prejudice and awarding such
other party any costs and attorney fees incurred by that party in obtaining the dismissal, including without
limitation copy costs, and expert and consultant fees and expenses. Pending final resolution of a dispute
hereunder, Contractor will proceed diligently with the performance of its obligations pursuant to this
Agreement.
19. Termination by Contractor. In the event Owner materially breaches any term of the Contract Documents,
Contractor will promptly give Written Notice of the breach to Owner. If Owner fails to cure the breach within
ten (10) days of the Written Notice, Contractor may terminate this Agreement by giving Written Notice to
Owner and recover from Owner the percentage of the Contract Sum represented by the Work completed on
the Project site as of the date of termination together with any out of pocket loss Contractor has sustained
with respect to materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion of the Work, less
any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation or damages as a
result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty,
as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession
or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations as well as all
warranties relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder.
Sa
m
p
l
e
Fo
r
m
of
Ag
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor US 190620 Page 5 of 7
20. Termination by Owner for Cause. Should Contractor fail to timely provide Owner with the certificates of
insurance, make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, fail to apply enough properly skilled
workmen or specified materials to properly prosecute the Work in accordance with Contractor’s schedule, or
otherwise materially breach any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without any prejudice
to any other right or remedy, give Contractor Written Notice thereof. If Contractor fails to cure its default
within ten (10) days, Owner may terminate this Agreement by giving Written Notice to Contractor. In such
case, Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual
rights of Contractor and/or take possession of the premises and all materials, tools, equipment, and
appliances thereon, and finish the Work by whatever method Owner deems expedient. Contractor will not be
entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum
exceeds the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation for additional administrative, architectural,
consultant, and legal services (including without limitation attorney fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other
expenses), such excess will be paid to Contractor, less any offsets. If such expense exceeds the unpaid
balance, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built,
inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control
at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations as well as all warranties
relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder.
21. Termination by Owner for Convenience. Notwithstanding any other provision contained in the Contract
Documents, Owner may, without cause and in its absolute discretion, terminate this Agreement at any time.
In the event of such termination, Contractor will be entitled to recover from Owner the percentage of the
Contract Sum equal to the percentage of the Work which Owner and/or its architect determines has been
completed on the Project site as of the date of termination together with any out of pocket loss Contractor has
sustained with respect to materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion of the
Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation as a
result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty,
as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession
or control at the time of termination. Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of
subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and
obligations as well as all warranties relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a
termination hereunder.
22. Enforcement. In the event either party commences legal action to enforce or rescind any term of this
Agreement, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover its attorney fees, costs and legal expenses, including
without limitation all copy costs and expert and consultant fees and expenses, incurred in that action and on all
appeals, from the other party.
23. Ownership of Materials, Products, and Intellectual Property Rights. Owner will retain ownership and
intellectual property rights in all plans, designs, drawings, documents, concepts, and materials provided by or
on behalf of Owner to Contractor and to all work products of Contractor and its subcontractors for products,
services, and Work provided under this Agreement, such products, services, and Work of Contractor and its
subcontractors constituting works made for hire. Neither Contractor nor its subcontractors will reuse any portion
of such items provided by Owner or work products developed by Contractor or its subcontractors for Owner
pursuant to this Agreement or disclose any such items to any third party without the prior written consent of
Owner. Owner may withhold its consent in its absolute discretion. Contractor shall obtain the written agreement
of each of its subcontractors to the terms of this section prior to permitting the subcontractor to perform any
services contemplated by this Agreement.
24. Comply with Intellectual Property Rights of Others. Contractor represents and warrants that no Work or
services (with its means, methods, goods, and services attendant thereto), provided to Owner will infringe or
violate any right of any third party and that Owner may use and exploit such Work, means, methods, goods,
and services without liability or obligation to any person or entity (specifically and without limitation, such Work,
means, methods, goods, and services will not violate rights under any patent, copyright, trademark, or other
intellectual property right or application for the same).
Sa
m
p
l
e
Fo
r
m
of
Ag
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor US 190620 Page 6 of 7
25. Ownership and Use of Renderings and Photographs. Renderings, photographs, and/or other images of or
representing the services, Work, or any improvement on or relative to the Project Site, whether created before,
during, or at completion of construction (and whether created by Owner, Contractor, or Contractor’s
subcontractors), are the property of the Owner. Contractor hereby transfers and assigns to Owner all ownership
and intellectual property rights that Contractor and/or its subcontractors may have in and to all such renderings,
photographs, and other images. The Owner reserves all rights including copyrights and other intellectual
property rights to such renderings, photographs, and other images. No such renderings, photographs, or other
images shall be used or distributed without written consent of the Owner.
26. Public Statements. Contractor will not make any statements or provide any information to the media about
the Project or Work without the prior written consent of Owner. If Contractor receives any requests for
information from media, Contractor will refer such requests to Owner.
27. Confidentiality. Contractor shall ensure that Contractor and its subcontractors, and the employees, agents
and representatives of Contractor and its subcontractors, maintain in strict confidence, and shall use and
disclose only as authorized by Owner all Confidential Information of Owner that Contractor receives in
connection with the performance of this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor may use and
disclose any information to the extent required by an order of any court or governmental authority, but only after
it has notified Owner and Owner has had an opportunity to obtain reasonable protection for such information in
connection with such disclosure. For purposes of this Agreement, “Confidential Information” means:
a. The name or address of any affiliate, customer or contractor of Owner or any information concerning the
transactions of any such person with Owner;
b. Any contracts, agreements, business plans, budgets or other financial information, renderings,
photographs, and materials provided by Owner, relating to the Work or any improvement on the Project
Site to the extent such has not been made available to the public by the Owner;
c. Any other information that is marked or noted as confidential at the time of its disclosure.
28. No Commercial Use of Transaction or Relationship. Without the prior written consent of Owner, which
Owner may grant or withhold in its sole discretion, neither Contractor nor Contractor’s affiliates, officers,
directors, agents, representatives, shareholders, members, Subcontractors, or employees shall make any
private commercial use of their relationship to Owner or the Project, including, without limitation:
a. By referring to the Owner or Project verbally or in any sales, marketing or other literature, letters, client
lists, press releases, brochures or other written materials except as may be necessary for Contractor to
perform Contractor’s obligations under the terms of this Agreement;
b. By using or allowing the use of any photographs of the Work or Project or any part thereof, or of any
service marks, trademarks or trade names or other intellectual property now or which may hereafter be
associated with, owned by or licensed by Owner, in connection with any work, service or product; or
c. By contracting with or receiving money or anything of value from any person or commercial entity to
facilitate such person or entity obtaining any type of commercial identification, advertising or visibility in
connection with the Owner or Project.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor may include a reference to Owner or the Project in a professional
résumé or other similar listing of Contractor’s references without seeking Owner’s written consent in each
instance, provided that such reference to Owner or the Project is included with at least several other similar
references to projects of different owners and is given no more prominence than such other references.
29. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto
and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral, relating to the
Project. This Agreement may be amended only by a writing signed by both parties. This Agreement will not be
construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between any persons or entities other than Owner
and Contractor.
30. Assignment. Contractor will not assign any right or obligation hereunder without the prior written consent of
Sa
m
p
l
e
Fo
r
m
of
Ag
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor US 190620 Page 7 of 7
the Owner, which consent may be granted or withheld in Owner’s absolute discretion.
31. Governing Law. The parties acknowledge that the Contract Documents have substantial connections to the
State of Utah. The Contract Documents will be deemed to have been made, executed, and delivered in Salt
Lake City, Utah. To the maximum extent permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters related
to their creation and performance will be governed by and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of
Utah, excluding conflicts of law rules, and (ii) all disputes arising from or related to the Contract Documents will
be decided only in a state or federal court located in Salt Lake City, Utah and not in any other court or state.
Toward that end, the parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Salt
Lake City, Utah and waive any other venue to which they might be entitled by virtue of domicile, habitual
residence, place of business, or otherwise.
32. Effective Date. The effective date of this Agreement is the date indicated by Owner’s signature.
OWNER: CONTRACTOR:
The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints,
a Utah corporation sole
Signature: Signature:
Print Name: Print Name:
Title: Title:
Address:
Address:
Telephone No: Telephone No:
Facsimile No: Facsimile No:
Email: Email:
Effective Date: Fed. I.D. or SSN:
License No:
Reviewed By: Date Signed:
Supplementary Conditions for Small Project Agreement US 210211 Page 1 of 1
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
FOR SMALL PROJECT AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (U.S.)
ITEM 1 - GENERAL
1. Conditions of the Small Project Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (U.S.) apply to each
Division of the Specifications.
2. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to all Divisions of the Specifications.
ITEM 2 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES PAYABLE TO OWNER
This section may be included as a separate additional paragraph to the Small Project Agreement
Between Owner and Contractor (U.S.), at Owner’s discretion:
Delay in Completion of the Work. For each day after the expiration of the designated Time of
Completion that Contractor has not completed the Work, Contractor will pay Owner the amount of
five hundred dollars ($500) per day as liquidated damages for Owner's loss of use and the added
administrative expense to Owner to administer the Project during the period of delay. In addition,
Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys’ fees, expert fees,
consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay. Owner
may deduct any liquidated damages or reimbursable expenses from any money due or to become
due to Contractor. If the amount of liquidated damages and reimbursable expenses exceeds any
amounts due to Contractor, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner within ten (10) days after
receipt of a written request from Owner for payment.
ITEM 3 - STATE SPECIFIC SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Idaho
N/A
END OF DOCUMENT
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 1 - Division 01
DIVISION 01
SECTION 01 0000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: R&I PROJECT
01 1000 SUMMARY
01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS
01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4301 QUALITY ASSURANCE – QUALIFICATIONS
01 4523 TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES
01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 6100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS
01 6400 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
01 6600 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
01 7000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01 7400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY
A. Work Covered By Contract Documents:
1. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to all other sections and divisions of Specifications. All
instructions contained in Specifications are directed to Contractor. Unless specifically provided otherwise,
all obligations set forth in Specifications are obligations of Contractor.
2. Comply with applicable laws and regulations.
B. Work By Owner:
1. Owner will furnish and install some portions of the Work with its own forces. Complete the Work
necessary to accommodate the Work to be performed by Owner before scheduled date for performance
of such Work.
2. Owner may provide furnishings and/or equipment for Project. Contractor will receive, store, and protect
such items on site until the date Owner accepts Project.
SECTION 01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
A. Separate Contracts:
1. Contracts may be issued by Owner for performance of certain construction operations at Project site.
2. Contractor will afford other contractors reasonable opportunity to place and store their materials and
equipment on site and to perform their work and will properly connect and coordinate its work with theirs
where applicable:
SECTION 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Project Conditions:
1. During construction period, Contractor will have use of premises for construction operations. Contractor
will ensure that Contractor, its employees, subcontractors, and employees comply with following
requirements:
a. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits shown on Drawings. Do not disturb portions of site
beyond Contract limits.
b. Do not allow alcoholic beverages, illegal drugs, or persons under their influence on Project Site.
c. Do not allow use of tobacco in any form on Project Site.
d. Do not allow pornographic or other indecent materials on site.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 2 - Division 01
e. Do not allow work on Project Site on Sundays except for emergency work.
f. Refrain from using profanity or being discourteous or uncivil to others on Project Site or while
performing The Work.
g. Wear shirts with sleeves, wear shoes, and refrain from wearing immodest, offensive, or obnoxious
clothing, while on Project Site.
h. Do not allow playing of obnoxious and loud music on Project Site. Do not allow playing of any music
within existing facilities.
i. Do not build fires on Project Site.
j. Do not allow weapons on Project Site, except those carried by law enforcement officers and/or other
uniformed security personnel who have been retained by Owner or Contractor to provide security
services.
2. Existing Facilities:
a. If Owner will occupy existing building, reasonably accommodate use of existing facilities by Owner.
SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Administrative Requirements:
1. Coordination:
a. Coordinate construction activities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
b. Coordinate construction operations that are dependent upon each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation.
c. Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given
to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
SECTION 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
A. Multiple Contract Coordination:
1. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of Temporary Facilities and Controls, Construction Waste
Management and Disposal services, and Final Cleaning for entire Project unless directed otherwise by
Owner’s Representative for those who perform work on Project from Notice to Proceed to date of
Substantial Completion.
B. Project Meetings And Conferences:
1. Attend preconstruction conference and organizational meeting scheduled by Architect or Owner
Representative at Project site or other convenient location.
2. Be prepared to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including such topics as:
a. Construction schedule, equipment deliveries, general inspection of tests, preparation of record
documents and O&M manuals, project cleanup, security , shop drawings, samples, use of premises,
work restrictions, and working hours.
2. Pre-Installation Conferences.
a. Attend pre-installation conferences specified in Contract Document.
SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submittal Procedure:
1. Coordination: Coordination preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently before performance of related construction activities to
avoid delay.
2. Process Time: Allow sufficient review time so installation will not be delayed by time required to process
submittals.
3. Identification: Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Include name of
entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
4. Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
B. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data: Submit product data, as required by individual Sections of Specifications.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for review and designate (stamp) approval of shop drawings.
3. Samples: Samples used for comparison with actual component to be installed. Samples when accepted
will be used for quality comparisons throughout course of construction.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 3 - Division 01
C. Informational Submittals:
1. Informational submittals are design data, test reports, certificates, manufacturer's instructions,
manufacturer's field reports, and other documentary data affirming quality of products and installations .
a. Return copies or PDF files marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Submittals that occur during project closeout.
SECTION 01 3500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Hot Work Permit (Available from Owner's Representative):
a. Required for doing hot work involving open flames or producing heat or sparks such as:
1) Brazing.
2) Cutting.
3) Grinding.
4) Soldering.
5) Thawing pipe.
6) Torch applied roofing.
7) Welding.
SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Administrative Requirements:
1. Conflicting Requirements:
a. If compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards establish different or conflicting
requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with most stringent requirement.
2. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels:
a. Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. Actual
installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed
minimum within reasonable limits.
3. Submit to Owner permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements,
notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records
establishing compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. Testing and inspecting services are used to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document
requirements.
2. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution
of the Work to verify compliance and guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that
proposed construction will comply with requirements. Owner or Owner’s designated representative(s) will
perform quality assurance to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Notify Owner immediately if asbestos-containing materials or other hazardous materials are encountered
while performing the Work.
C. Quality Control:
1. Quality Control Services:
a. Quality Control will be sole responsibility of Contractor.
1) Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to
evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply
with requirements performed by Contractor.
a) They do not include inspections, tests or related actions performed by Architect or Owner
Representative, governing authorities or independent agencies hired by Owner or
Architect.
b) Quality assurance performed by Owner will be used to validate Quality Control performed
by Contractor.
2) Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage qualified Testing Agency to
perform these quality control services:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 4 - Division 01
a) Contractor will not employ same testing entity engaged by Owner, without Owner’s written
approval.
D. Repair And Protection:
1. On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction
and restore substrates and finishes.
2. Protect construction exposed by or for Quality Assurance and Quality Control activities.
3. Repair and protection are Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for Quality
Assurance and Quality Control Services.
SECTION 01 4301 QUALITY ASSURANCE - QUALIFICATIONS
A. Qualifications: Qualifications in this Section establish minimum qualification levels required; individual
Specification Sections specify additional requirements:
1. Fabricator / Supplier / Installer Qualifications:
a. Firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with record of
successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required
units:
1) Where heading ‘VMR (Value Managed Relationship) Suppliers / Installers' is used to identify list
of specified suppliers or installers, Owner has established relationships that extend beyond
requirements of this Project. No other suppliers / installers will be acceptable. Follow specified
procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified suppliers / installers and
advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships.
2) Where heading 'Acceptable or Approved Suppliers / Installers / Fabricators' is used to identify
list of specified suppliers / installers / fabricators, use only one of listed suppliers / installers /
fabricators. No others will be acceptable.
2. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications:
a. Authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those
indicated for this Project.
3. Installer Qualifications:
a. Firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with record of
successful in-service performance.
4. Manufacturer Qualifications:
a. Firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and
with record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce
required units.
5. Manufacturer’s Field Services Qualifications:
a. Experienced authorized representative of manufacturer to inspect field-assembled components and
equipment installation, including service connections.
6. Professional Engineer Qualifications:
a. Professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and
who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated:
1) Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of system, assembly, or
products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
7. Specialists:
a. Certain sections of Specifications require that specific construction activities will be performed by
entities who are recognized experts in those operations:
1) Specialists will satisfy qualification requirements indicated and will be engaged for activities
indicated.
2) Requirement for special will not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.
8. Testing Agency Qualifications:
a. Independent Testing Agency with experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.
b. Testing Laboratory:
1) AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) Accreditation Program.
2) Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL).
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 5 - Division 01
3) Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL): Nationally recognized testing laboratory
according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
4) National Voluntary Laboratory (NVLAP): Testing Agency accredited according to National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Technology Administration, U. S. Department of
Commerce Accreditation Program.
SECTION 01 4523 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A. Submittals:
1. Certificates: Testing Agency will submit certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service.
2. Tests and Evaluation Reports:
a. Testing Agency or Agencies will prepare logs, test reports, and certificates applicable to specific
tests and inspections and deliver copies to Owner’s Representative and to each of following if
involved on project: Architect, Consulting Engineers (Engineer of Record), General Contractor,
Authorities Having Jurisdiction (if required).
3. Testing Agency:
a. Qualifications of Testing Agency management, personnel, inspector and technicians designated to
project.
b. Provide procedures for non-destructive testing, equipment calibration records, personnel training
records, welding inspection, bolting inspection, shear connector stud inspection, and seismic
connection inspections.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. Owner or Owner’s designated representative(s) will perform quality assurance. Owner’s quality
assurance procedures may include observations, inspections, testing, verification, monitoring and any
other procedures deemed necessary by Owner to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
2. Owner will employ independent Testing Agencies to perform certain specified testing, as Owner deems
necessary.
3. Certification:
a. Product producers and associations, which have instituted approved systems of quality control and
which have been approved by document approval agencies, are not required to have further testing.
b. Concrete mixing plants, plants producing fabricated concrete and wood or plywood products certified
by agency, lumber, plywood grade marked by approved associates, and materials or equipment
bearing underwriters’ laboratory labels require no further testing and inspection.
4. Written Practice for Quality Assurance:
a. Testing Agency will maintain written practice for selection and administration of inspection
personnel, describing training, experience, and examination requirements for qualification and
certification of inspection personnel.
b. Written practice will describe testing agency procedures for determining acceptability of structure in
accordance with applicable codes, standards, and specifications.
c. Written practice will describe Testing Agency inspection procedures, including general inspection,
material controls, visual welding inspection, and bolting inspection.
C. Quality Control:
1. Quality Control will be sole responsibility of Contractor. Contractor will be respo nsible for testing,
coordination, start-up, operational checkout, and commissioning of all items of the Work included in
Project. All costs for these services will be included in Contractor’s cost of the Work .
2. Notify results of all Testing and Inspection performed by Contractor’s independent Testing Agencies to
Architect and/or Owner’s Representative within 24 hours of test or inspection having been performed :
a. Testing and Inspection Reports will be distributed as follows:
1) 1 copy to Owner’s Representative.
2) 1 copy to Architect.
3) 1 copy to Consulting Engineer(s) (Engineer of Record).
4) 1 copy to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (if required).
3. Contractor’s Responsibility:
a. Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s
obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents .
b. Tests and inspections that are not explicitly assigned to Owner are responsibility of Contractor.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 6 - Division 01
c. Cooperate with Testing Agency(s) performing required inspections, tests, and similar services and
provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify Testing Agency before operations to
allow assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to :
1) Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor, equipment, and facilities deemed
necessary by Testing Agency to facilitate inspections and tests at no additional cost to Owner.
2) Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or
helping Testing Agency in taking samples.
3) Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing
laboratories.
4) Providing Testing Agency with preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that
require control by Testing Agency.
d. For any requested inspection, Contractor will complete prior inspections to ensure that items are
ready for inspection.
e. All Work is subject to testing and inspection and verification of correct operation.
f. Comply:
1) Upon completion of Testing Agency’s inspection, testing, sample-taking, and similar services,
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies,
including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes.
2) Comply with Contract Documents in making such repairs.
g. Data:
1) Furnish records, drawings, certificates, and similar data as may be required by testing and
inspection personnel to assure compliance with Contract Documents.
h. Defective Work (Non-Conforming Work): Non-conforming Work as covered in General Conditions
applies, but is not limited to following requirements Protection:
1) Where results of inspections, tests, or similar services show that the Work does not comply with
Contract Document requirements, correct deficiencies in the Work promptly to avoid work
delays.
2) Where testing personnel take cores or cut-outs to verify compliance, repair prior to acceptance.
3) Contractor will be responsible for any and all costs incurred resulting from inspection that was
scheduled prematurely or retesting due to failed tests.
4) Remove and replace any Work found defective or not complying with contract document
requirements at no additional cost to Owner.
5) Should test return unacceptable results, Contractor will bear all costs of retesting and re -
inspection as well as cost of all material consumed by testing, and replacement of
unsatisfactory material and/or workmanship.
i. Protection:
1) Protect construction exposed by or for quality assurance and quality control service activities,
and protect repaired construction.
j. Scheduling: Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples,
and similar activities:
1) Schedule testing and inspections in advance so as not to delay the Work and to eliminate any
need to uncover the Work for testing or inspection.
2) Notify Testing Agency and Architect or Owner as noted in Sections in Division 01 thru Division
50 prior to any time required for such services.
3) Incorporate adequate time for performance of all inspections and correction of noted
deficiencies.
4) Schedule sequence of activities to accommodate required services with minimum of delay.
5) Schedule sequence of activities to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate testing and inspections.
k. Test and Inspection Log:
1) Provide system of tracking all field reports, describing items noted, and resolution of each item.
Prepare record of tests and inspections. Include following requirements:
(a) Date test or inspection was conducted.
(b) Description of the Work tested or inspected.
(c) Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect or Owner Representative.
(d) Identification of Testing Agency or inspector conducting test or inspection.
2) Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provid e access to
test and inspection log for Architect's or Owner’s reference during normal working hours.
D. Tests And Inspections - General:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 7 - Division 01
1. Testing specifically identified to be conducted by Owner, will be performed by an independent entity and
will be arranged and paid for by Owner.
2. Individual Sections in Division 01 through Division 50 indicate if Owner will provide testing and inspection
of the Work of that Section.
3. Owner may engage additional consultants for testing, air balancing, commissio ning, or other special
services:
a. Activities of any such Owner consultants are in addition to Contractor testing of materials or systems
necessary to prove that performance is in compliance with Contract requirements.
b. Contractor must cooperate with persons and firms engaged in these activities.
4. Tests include but not limited to those described in detail in 'Field Quality Control' in Part 3 of Individual
Sections in Divisions 01 through Division 50.
5. Taking Specimens:
a. Only testing laboratory shall secure, handle, transp ort, or store any samples and specimens for
testing.
6. Scheduling Testing Agency:
a. Contractor will coordinate the Work and facilitate timeliness of such testing and inspecting services
so as not to delay the Work.
b. Contractor will notify Testing Agency and Architect or Owner Representative to schedule tests and /
or inspections.
E. Testing Agency Services And Responsibility:
1. Testing Agency, including independent testing laboratories, will be licensed and authorized to operate in
jurisdiction in which Project is located:
a. Approved Testing Agency Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 apply.
2. Testing and Inspection Services:
a. Testing Agency will not release, revoke, alter, or increase Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
b. Testing Agency will not give direction or instruction to Contractor.
c. Testing Agency will have full authority to see that the Work is performed in strict accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents and directions of Owner’s Representative and/or Architect.
d. Testing Agency will not provide additional testing and inspection services beyond scope of the Work
without prior approval of Owner’s Representative and/or Architect.
3. Testing Agency Duties:
a. Independent Testing Agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and
construction specified in individual specification Sections will cooperate with Architect or Owner
Representative and Contractor in performance of its duties and will provide qualified personnel to
perform required inspections and tests.
b. Testing Agency will test or obtain certificates of tests of materials and methods of construction, as
described herein or elsewhere in technical specification.
c. Testing Agency will provide management, personnel, equipment, and services necessary to perform
testing functions as outlined in this section.
d. Testing Agency must have experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated by
ASTM standards and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed.
e. Testing Agency will comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM
C1077, ASTM C1093, ASTM D3666, ASTM D3740, and other relevant ASTM standards.
f. Testing Agency must calibrate all testing equipment at reasonable intervals (minimum yea rly) with
accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical
constants.
g. Welding Procedure Review: Testing Agency will provide review and approval or rejection of all
welding procedures to be used and verify compliance with all reference standard requirements.
4. Testing and Inspection Reports:
a. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
b. Laboratory Reports: Testing Agency will furnish reports of materials and construction as required,
including:
1) Description of method of test.
2) Identification of sample and portion of the Work tested:
(a) Description of location in the Work of sample.
(b) Time and date when sample was obtained.
(c) Weather and climatic conditions at time when sample was obtained.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 8 - Division 01
3) Evaluation of results of tests including recommendations for action.
c. Inspection Reports:
1) Testing Agency will furnish “Inspection at Site” reports for each site visit documenting ac tivities,
observations, and inspections.
2) Include notation of weather and climatic conditions, time and date conditions and status of the
Work, actions taken, and recommendations or evaluation of the Work.
d. Reporting Testing and Inspection (Conforming Work):
1) Submit testing and inspection reports as required within twenty four (24) hours of test or
inspection having been performed.
e. Reporting Testing and Inspection Defective Work (Non-Conforming Work):
1) Testing Agency, upon determination of irregularities, defic iencies observed or test failure(s)
observed in the Work during performance of its services of test or inspection having been
performed, will:
(a) Verbally notify results to Architect, Contractor, and Owner’s Representative within one
hour of test or inspection having been performed (if Defective Work (Non-Conforming
Work) is incorporated into project).
(b) Submit written inspection report and test results as required within twenty four (24) hours
of test or inspection having been performed.
f. Final Report:
1) Submit final report of tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which identify unresolved
deficiencies.
F. Architect's Responsibility:
1. Architect Duties:
a. Notify Owner’s Representative before each test and/or inspection:
G. Field Quality Control:
1. Field Tests And Inspections:
a. Field Test and Inspection requirements are described in detail in ‘Field Quality Control’ in Part 3
Execution' of individual Sections in Division 01 thru Division 49.
SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
A. Administrative Requirements:
1. Contractor is responsible for security of materials, tools, and equipment. Do not permit others to use
building keys provided by Owner. Safeguard building and contents while the Work is being performed and
secure building when the Work is finished for day.
2. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that
comply with environmental regulations and reduce possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be
contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result:
a. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise.
b. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons
or firms near site.
c. Protect the Work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures from injury due to weather, theft, and vandalism.
3. Existing restroom facilities may be used by Contractor. Clean restrooms and portions of existing building
used in accessing restrooms daily. If existing facilities are not usable, provide and maintain temporary
sanitary toilet.
B. Temporary Barriers And Enclosures:
1. Protect existing trees and plants. Remove and replace vegetation that dies or is damaged beyond repair
due to construction activities.
2. Erect adequate barricades, warning signs, and lights necessary to protect persons from injury or harm.
3. Provide temporary enclosures at exterior building openings for security and protection from weather, theft,
and vandalism. Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and enclosures as required to prevent spread of
dust and fumes to occupied portions of building.
4. Proprietary Camera Services: In its absolute discretion, and with or without notice to Contractor, Owner
may provide from time to time, but is not obligated to provide, one or more cameras on or about Project
site and/or signage or notices of the same:
a. If provided by Owner, such camera(s) and/or signage and notices are solely for Owner’s benefit and
convenience and shall not be for benefit of Contractor, Subcontra ctor(s) or for any third person.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 9 - Division 01
b. Owner shall have no liability, obligation, or responsibility to Contractor, Subcontractors, or any third
person relative to such camera(s), signage, or notices, or absence of camera(s), signage, or notices,
including without limitation, installation, maintenance, operation, repair, testing, functionality,
capacity, recording, monitoring, posting, etc., of the same (hereafter ‘Proprietary Camera Services’).
c. Contractor, with Owner’s prior consent (which shall not be unreasonably withheld), may relocate
such camera(s), signage, or notices as necessary to not unreasonably, materially and physically
interfere with work at Project Site.
d. Contractor’s obligations under Contract Documents, including but not limited to, Contractor’s
obligation for security of Project Site, are not modified by Owner’s opportunity to provide, actually
providing, or not providing Proprietary Camera Services and/or signage or notices regarding the
same.
e. This Specification Section does not preclude Contractor from providing its own camera(s), signage,
or notices pursuant to terms and conditions of this Agreement. Neither does this Section reduce,
expand or modify any other right or obligation of Owner pursuant to terms of this Agreement.
C. Utilities:
1. Electrical Power: Owner will provide electric power for construction activities within limits available at
existing facility.
2. Fire Protection: Exercise caution to avoid fire damage: Do not build fires on site.
3. Heating, Cooling, And Ventilation:
a. Permanent mechanical system may be operated upon following conditions:
1) Do not interfere with normal set-back temperature patterns except as approved by Project
Manager.
2) Do not operate system when the Work causing airborne dust is occurring or when dust caused
by such Work is present without first installing temporary filtering system.
4. Lighting: Existing lighting system may be used by Contractor.
5. Water Service: Contractor will use existing water supply for construction purposes to extent of existing
facilities.
SECTION 01 6100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Administrative Requirements:
1. Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, are undamaged, and, unless otherwise indicated, are
new and unused at time of installation. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards,
and other devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended use and effect.
SECTION 01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Product selection is governed by Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project
experience. Procedures governing product selection include:
1. Substitutions And Equal Products:
a. Generally speaking, substitutions for specified products and systems, as defined in Uniform
Commercial Code, are not acceptable. However, equal products may be approved upon compliance
with Contract Document requirements.
b. Approved Products / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers:
1) Category One:
(a) Owner has established ‘Value Managed Relationships’ that extend beyond requirements
of this Project. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project.
(b) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified
manufacturers / suppliers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships.
2) Category Two:
(a) Owner has established National Contracts that contain provisions extending beyond
requirements of this Project. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this
Project.
(b) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified
manufacturers / suppliers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships.
3) Category Three:
(a) Specified products are provided to Church Projects under a National Account Program.
Use these products to preserve advantages that accrue to Owner from those programs.
No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 10 - Division 01
4) Category Four:
(a) Provide only specified products available from manufacturers listed. No substitutions,
private-labeled, or equal products, or mixing of manufacturers’ products is allowed on this
Project.
(b) In Sections where lists recapitulating Manufacturers previously mentioned in Section are
included under heading ‘Manufacturers’ or ‘Approved Manufacturers’, this is intended as
convenience to Contractor as listing of contact information only. It is not intended that all
manufacturers in list may provide products where specific products and manufacturers are
listed elsewhere in Section.
c. Acceptable Products / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers:
1) Type One: Use specified products / manufacturers unless approval to use other products /
manufacturers has been obtained from Architect or Owner Representative by Addendum.
2) Type Two: Use specified products / manufacturers unless approval to use other products and
manufacturers has been obtained from Architect or Owner Representative in writing before
installing or applying unlisted or private-labeled products.
3) Use ‘Equal Product Approval Request Form’ to request approval of equal products,
manufacturers, or suppliers before bidding or before installation, as noted in individual
Sections.
d. Quality / Performance Standard Products / Manufacturers:
1) Class One: Use specified product / manufacturer or equal product from specified
manufacturers only.
2) Class Two: Use specified product / manufacturer or equal product from any manufacturer.
3) Products / manufacturers used will conform to Contract Document requirements.
SECTION 01 6400 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Administrative Requirements:
1. Install items furnished by Owner or receive and store in safe condition items purchased directly by
Owner according to requirements of Contract Documents.
SECTION 01 6600 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A. Administrative Requirements:
1. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's recommendations, using means and
methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Delivery, Storage, and Handling:
1. Delivery and Acceptable Requirements:
a. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's recommendations, usin g means and
methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
b. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
c. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system,
complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
d. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with Contract Documents, and to ensure that
products are undamaged and properly protected.
2. Storage and Handling Requirements:
a. Store products at site in manner that will simplify inspection and measurement of quantity or
counting of units.
b. Store heavy materials away from Project structure so supporting construction will not be
endangered.
c. Store products subject to damage by elements above ground, under cover in weather tight
enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity
within range required by manufacturer's instructions.
SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Administrative Requirements:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 11 - Division 01
1. Require installer of each major component to inspect both substrate and conditions under which the Work
is to be done:
a. Notify Owner in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.
b. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Common Installation Provisions:
1. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing the Work:
a. Secure the Work true to line and level.
b. Allow for expansion and building movement.
2. Recheck measurements and dimensions before starting each installation.
3. Design, furnish, and install all shoring, bracing, and sheathing as required for safety and for proper
execution of the Work and, unless otherwise required, remove same when the Work is completed.
4. Where mounting heights are not shown, install individual components at standard mounting heights
recognized within industry or local codes for that application. Refer questionable mounting height
decisions to Owner for final decision.
C. Protection:
1. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soiling and damage when demolition the Work
is performed in rooms and areas from which such items have not been removed.
D. Completion Inspection:
1. Upon 100 percent completion of Project, Contractor will request Substantial Completion Inspection.
2. Owner will conduct Substantial Completion Inspection in presence of Contractor and furnish list of items
to be corrected.
3. Contractor will notify Owner in writing when items have been corrected.
SECTION 01 7400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Disposal Of Waste:
1. Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from
Project site and legally dispose of them in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate
on-site.
b. Remove and transport debris in manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas .
2. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
3. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.
B. Progress Cleaning:
1. Keep premises broom-clean during progress of the Work.
2. During handling and installation, protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply
protective covering where required to ensure protection from soiling, damage, or deterioration until
Substantial Completion.
3. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout construction period.
4. Remove waste materials and rubbish caused by employees, subcontractors, and contractors under
separate contract with Owner and dispose of legally.
C. Final Cleaning:
1. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in normal, commercial-building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions. Remove all rubbish from under and
about building and leave building clean and habitable.
2. In addition to general cleaning noted above, perform cleaning for all trades at completion of the Work in
areas where construction activities have occurred.
3. If Contractor fails to clean up, Owner may do so and charge cost to Contractor.
SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. General:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 12 - Division 01
1. Closeout process consists of three specific project closeout inspections. Contractor shall plan sufficient
time in construction schedule to allow for required inspections before expiration of Contract Time .
2. Contractor shall conduct his own inspections of The Work and shall not request closeout inspections until
The Work of the contract is reasonably complete and correction of obvious defects or omissions are
complete or imminent.
3. Date of Substantial Completion shall not occur until completion of construction work, unless agreed to by
Architect / Owner’s Representative and included on Certificate of Substantial Completion.
B. Preliminary Closeout Review:
1. When Architect, Owner and Contractor agree that project is ready for closeout, Pre -Substantial Inspection
shall be scheduled. Preparation of floor substrate to receive carpeting and any work which could
conceivably damage or stain carpet must be completed, as carpet installation will be scheduled
immediately following this inspection.
2. Prior to this inspection, completed test and evaluation reports for HVAC system and font, where one
occurs, are to be provided to Project Manager, Architect, and applicable consultants.
3. Architect, Owner and Contractor review completion of punch list items. When Owner and Architect
confirm that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of The Work, Owner, Architect and
Contractor will execute Certificate of Substantial Completion that contains :
a. Punch list of items requiring completion and correction will be created.
b. Time frame for completion of punch list items will be established, and date for Substantial
Completion Inspection shall be set.
C. Substantial Completion Inspection:
1. When Architect, Owner and Contractor agree that project is ready for Substantial Completion, an
inspection is held. Punch list created at Pre-Substantial Inspection is to be substantially complete.
2. Prior to this inspection, Contractor shall discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from
the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups and similar elements.
3. Architect, Owner and Contractor review completion of punch list items. When Owner and Architect
confirm that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of The Work, Owner, Architect and
Contractor will execute Certificate of Substantial Completion that contains:
a. Date of Substantial Completion.
b. Punch List Work not yet completed, including seasonal and long lead items.
c. Amount to be withheld for completion of Punch List Work.
d. Time period for completion of Punch List Work.
e. Amount of liquidated damages set forth in Supplementary Conditions to be assessed if Contractor
fails to complete Punch List Work within time set forth in Certificate.
4. Contractor shall present Closeout Submittals to Architect and place tools, spare parts, extra stock, and
similar items required by Contract Documents in locations as directed by Facilities Manager.
D. Final Acceptance Meeting:
1. When punch list items except for any seasonal items or long lead items which will not prohibit occupancy
are completed, Final Acceptance Meeting is held.
2. Owner, Architect and Contractor execute Owner’s Project Closeout - Final Acceptance form, and verify:
a. All seasonal and long lead items not prohibiting occupancy, if any, are identified, with committed to
completion date and amount to be withheld until completion.
b. Owner’s maintenance personnel have been instructed on all system operation and maintenance as
required by the Contract Documents.
c. Final cleaning requirements have been completed.
3. If applicable, once any seasonal and long lead items are completed, Closeout Inspection is held where
Owner and Architect verify that The Work has been satisfactorily completed, and Owner, Architect and
Contractor execute Closeout portion of the Project Closeout - Final Acceptance form.
4. When Owner and Architect confirm that The Work is satisfactorily completed, Architect will authorize final
payment.
SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Administrative Requirements:
1. Project Record Documents:
a. Do not use record documents for construction purposes:
1) Protect from deterioration and loss in secure, fire-resistive location.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
General Requirements - 13 - Division 01
2) Provide access to record documents for reference during normal Working hours.
b. Maintain clean, undamaged set of Drawings. Mark set to show actual installation where installation
varies from the Work as originally shown. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would
be difficult to measure and record at later date:
1) Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in
separate categories of the Work.
2) Mark new information that is important to Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings.
3) Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.
2. As Built Record Drawings:
a. Provide two full-size sets of prints and PDF file of As Built Record Drawings to Facilities
Management Office, printed from the updated AutoCAD drawing files or updated Revit model files,
as specified by Owner, that have been modified to show actual dimensions and location of
equipment, material, utility lines, and other work as actually constructed, based upon information
provided by Contractor. Architect will submit updated As Built Record Drawings in PDF (ISO32000
format) to Owner. In addition, Architect will submit to Owner updated AutoCAD as built record
drawing files with associated plot style tables or the Revit as built record model files, as specified by
Owner.
B. Operations And Maintenance Manual:
1. General:
a. Include closeout submittal documentation as required by Contract Documentation. Include only
closeout submittals as defined in individual specification section.
b. Submittal Format: Digital copies unless otherwise noted, required for each individual specification
section that include ‘Closeout Submittals’.
2. Project Manual:
c. Copy of complete Project Manual including Addenda, Modifications as defined in General
Conditions, and other interpretations issued during construction:
(1) Mark these documents to show variations in actual Work performed in comparison with text of
specifications and Modifications.
(2) Show substitutions, selection of options, and similar information, particularly on elements that
are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
3. Maintenance Contracts: (digital format only).
4. Operations and Maintenance Data (digital format only):
a. Operations and maintenance submittals includes cleaning instructions, maintenance instructions,
operations instructions, equipment list, and parts lists.
5. Warranty Documentation: Digital format of final, executed warranties.
6. Record Documentation:
a. Documentation includes Certifications, color and pattern selections, Design Date, Geotechnical
Evaluation Reports (soils reports), Manufacture Reports, Literature or cut sheets, Shop Drawings,
Source Quality Control, Special Procedures, and Testing and Inspection Reports .
7. Irrigation Plan: Laminated and un-laminated reduced sized hard copies.
8. Landscape Management Plan (LMP):
a. Irrigation Section:
(1) Documentation required by Sections under 32 8000 Heading: Irrigation.
b. Landscaping Section:
(1) Documentation required by Sections under 32 8000 Heading: Irrigation.
C. Warranties:
1. When written guarantees beyond one (1) year after substantial completion are required by Contract
Documents, secure such guarantees and warranties properly addressed and signed in favor of Owner.
Include these documents in Operations & Maintenance Manual(s) specified above.
2. Delivery of guarantees and warranties will not relieve Contractor from obligations assumed under other
provisions of Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
B L A N K P A G E
Table of Contents - 1 - 02 0000
D I V I S I O N 02: E X I S T I N G C O N D I T I O N S
02 4000 D E M O L I T I O N
02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Selective Structure Demolition - 1 - 02 4119
SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute:
a. NFPA 241, ‘Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations’,
2013 Edition.
2. American Society of Safety Engineers:
a. ASSE A10.6-2006, ‘Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations ’.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Storage or sale of removed items or materials will not be permitted on-site.
B. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Before beginning Selective Demolition work, in addition to requirements of Section 01 3100, meet
on site to confirm work to be demolished, items to be salvaged or reused, and coordination with
Owner.
C. Scheduling:
1. Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and en ding
dates for each activity, on Schedule specified in Section 01 3200.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Special Procedure Submittals:
a. Inventory:
1) After selective demolition is complete, submit list of items that have been removed and
salvaged.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition.
2. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Selective Structure Demolition - 2 - 02 4119
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions:
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
a. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before
proceeding with selective demolition.
B. Evaluation And Assessment:
1. Hazardous Materials:
a. It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. Identified
hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
b. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb
and immediately notify Architect.
2. Inventory and record condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed
and salvaged.
3. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit written report to Architect.
4. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether rem oving
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure
or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
5. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demol ition
activities.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Facilities:
1. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and
damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
2. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
B. Temporary Shoring:
1. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability
and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to
prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
2. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
C. Utility Services:
1. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and pr otect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
2. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
a. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Selective Structure Demolition - 3 - 02 4119
b. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with selective demolition, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General:
1. Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
2. Demolish and remove existing construction only to extent required by new construction and as
indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of gover ning regulations
and as follows:
a. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand
tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to
minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
b. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
c. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before
starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
d. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
e. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
f. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free
fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
g. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
h. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Selective Demolition Procedures For Specific Materials:
1. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
2. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents,
commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that
may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and
salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.
a. Clean salvaged items as directed by Owner.
b. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
c. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
d. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
e. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to
match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make
item functional for use indicated.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Selective Structure Demolition - 4 - 02 4119
E. Existing Items to Remain:
1. Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.
2. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location
during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective
demolition operations are complete.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General:
1. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations.
2. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
B. Waste Management:
1. Disposal of Demolished Materials:
a. Remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA -
approved landfill. Do not burn demolished materials.
1) Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2) Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3) Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
END OF SECTION
Table of Contents - 1 - 03 0000
D I V I S I O N 03: C O N C R E T E
03 3000 C A S T - I N - P L A C E C O N C R E T E
03 3111 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 1 - 03 3111
SECTION 03 3111
CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install concrete work as described in Contract Documents including:
a. Quality of concrete used on Project but furnished under other Sections.
b. Concrete mix information and use of admixtures.
c. Field Quality Control Testing and Inspection requirements for concrete.
d. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other concrete related sections.
e. Sealants and curing compounds used with concrete.
f. Compact aggregate base for miscellaneous cast-in-place concrete.
g. Miscellaneous cast-in-place concrete and equipment pads.
B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:
1. Concrete accessories.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 0000: ‘General Requirements’:
a. Section 01 1200: 'Multiple Contract Summary' for Owner Furnished Testing and Inspecting
Services.
b. Section 01 4523: ‘Testing and Inspecting Services’ for testing and inspection, and testing
laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods.
2. Section 31 1123: 'Aggregate Base' for aggregate base under miscellaneous cast-in-place
concrete and exterior slabs, under interior slabs-on-grade concrete, and asphalt paving.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI
Periodicals and Publications.
a. ACI 117.1R-14: ‘Guide for Tolerance Compatibility in Concrete Construction'.
b. Certifications:
1) ACI CP-1(16), ‘Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing
Technician-Grade 1’.
2) ACI CP-10(10), 'Craftsman Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Flatwork
Technician/Finisher'.
3) ACI CP-19(16), ‘Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Strength Testing
Technician’.
B. Definitions:
1. Cold Weather, as referred to in this Section, is four (4) hours with ambient temperature below 40
deg F (4.4 deg C) in twenty-four (24) hour period.
2. Floor Flatness (FF): Rate of change in elevation of floor over 12 inches (305 mm) section.
3. Floor Levelness (FL): Measures difference in elevation between two points which are 10 feet
(3.05 m) apart.
4. Hot Weather, as referred to in this Section, is ambient air temperature above 100 deg F (38 deg
C) or ambient air temperature above 90 deg F (32 deg C) with wind velocity 8 mph (12.9 kph) or
greater.
C. Reference Standards:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 2 - 03 3111
1. American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials:
a. AASHTO M 153-06 (2016), ‘Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction'.
2. American Concrete Institute
a. ACI 117-10 (R2015): ‘Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
and Commentary'.
b. ACI 305.1-14, ‘Specification for Hot Weather Concreting’.
c. ACI 306.1-90 (R2002), ‘Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting’.
d. ACI 318-14, ‘Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete' (ACI 318) and
'Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete' (ACI 318R).
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 01 3100 and held
jointly with following sections:
2. Schedule pre-installation conference prior to placing of footings, installation of foundation forms
and reinforcing steel, and installation of anchors, dowels, inserts, and block out s in foundation
walls and slabs.
3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following:
a. Set up concrete placement pour card system and verify that all relevant trades have signed
off prior to concrete placement.
b. Obtaining trade sign-offs on each pour card will be responsibility of General Contactor’s
foreman or whoever is in charge of ordering concrete.
c. Pour cards will be turned in to Quality Assurance representative after the work has been
completed so that they can be reviewed and filed.
d. Review installation scheduling, coordination, placement of building concrete, and placement
of items installed in and under concrete.
e. Review installation scheduling, coordination and placement of site concrete and of items
installed in concrete.
f. Review 'Verification of Conditions' requirements.
g. Review requirements for preparation of subgrade and aggregate base requirements.
h. Review formwork requirements.
i. Review approved mix design requirements, mix designs and use of admixtures.
j. Review reinforcing bar submittals.
k. Review installation schedule and placement of reinforcing bars.
l. Review placement, finishing, and curing of concrete, including cold and hot weather
requirements.
m. Review joint layout plan for control and expansion joints , fillers for sidewalks, curbs, and
gutters:
1) Review jointing requirements.
B. Scheduling:
1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before placing concrete.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Certificates:
a. Installers:
1) Certification for National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA).
2) Certification for ACI-certified Flatwork Finishers and Technicians.
2. Design Data:
a. Mix Design:
1) Furnish proposed mix design to Architect for review prior to commencement of Work.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 3 - 03 3111
a) Include density (unit weight) and void content determined per ASTM
C1688/C1688M for fresh mixed properties and per ASTM C140/C140M for
hardened concrete properties.
b) Mix design shall show proposed admixture, amount, usage instructions, and
justification for proposed use.
b. Ready-Mix Supplier:
1) Require mix plant to furnish delivery ticket for each batch of concrete. Keep delivery
tickets at job-site for use of Owner or his representatives. Tickets shall show following:
a) Name of ready-mix batch plant.
b) Serial number of ticket.
c) Date and truck number.
d) Name of Contractor.
e) Name and location of Project.
f) Specific class or designation of concrete conforming to that used in Contract
Documents.
g) Amount of concrete.
h) Amount and type of cement.
i) Total water content allowed by mix design.
j) Amount of water added at plant.
k) Sizes and weights of sand and aggregate.
l) Time loaded.
m) Type, name, manufacturer, and amount of admixtures used.
n) Design Data.
2) Provide certificates with supporting testing reports verifying compliance with Contract
Document requirements and that materials provided are from single source for
following:
a) Cement.
b) Aggregate.
c) Fly Ash.
3. Source Quality Control Submittals:
a. Concrete mix design: Submit mix designs to meet following requirements:
1) Mix Type B:
a) Unexposed interior concrete slabs on grade.
b) 3500 psi (24.13 MPa) minimum at twenty-eight (28) days.
c) Water / Cementitious Material: 0.45 maximum by weight.
b. Slump:
1) 4 inch (100 mm) slump maximum before addition of high range water reducer.
2) 8 inch (200 mm) slump maximum with use of high range water reducer.
3) Slump not required for Mix Type G.
c. Admixtures:
1) Mix design shall show proposed admixture, amount, u sage instructions, and justification
for proposed use. Do not use any admixture without Architect's written approval.
2) Fly ash: Amount of specified Class F (or Class C where Class F is not available) fly ash
not to exceed twenty-five (25) percent of weight of cementations materials may used.
3) Chemical:
a) Specified accelerator or retarder may be used if necessary to meet environmental
conditions.
b) Special additives to promote rapid drying concrete, or moisture vapor reduction
(MVRA), may be used in interior concrete slabs on grade and elevated concrete
decks that will receive flooring if necessary to meet construction schedules.
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Record Documentation:
1) Pour Reports:
a) Provide report that records following information:
b) Date and time of start of pour, Date and time of end of pour, and Date and time of
end of finishing procedures.
c) Temperature at start of pour, Temperature at end of Pour, and Maximum
temperature during performance of finishing procedures.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 4 - 03 3111
d) Wind speed at start of pour, Wind speed at end of pour, and Maximum wind speed
during performance of finishing procedures.
e) Humidity at start of pour, Humidity at end of pour, and High and low humidity
during performance of finishing procedures.
f) Cloud cover at start of pour, Cloud cover at end of pour, and High and low cloud
cover during performance of finishing procedures.
g) Screeding method and equipment used.
h) Saw cut method and equipment used.
2) Testing and Inspection Reports:
a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of concrete.
3) Warranty. Submit rapid concrete drying or MVRA manufacturer warranties for concrete
moisture vapor emission induced flooring failure and adhesion; ensure both have been
completed in project’s name and registered with manufacturer.
a) Provide warranty to cover cost of flooring failures due to moisture migration from
slabs for life of concrete. Include cost of repair or removal of failed flooring,
placement of topical moisture remediation system, and replacement of flooring with
comparable flooring system.
b) Provide stand-alone adhesion warranty matching duration of flooring adhesive or
primer manufacturer's material defect warranty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following:
1. Installers and Installation Supervisor:
a. ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified
Concrete Flatwork Technician.
2. Ready-Mix Supplier:
a. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M requirements and be certified according to NRMCA's
'Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities '.
3. Testing Agencies:
a. Independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329.
1) Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Fie ld Testing
Technicians, Grade I according to ACI CP-1 or equivalent certification program.
2) Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -
Grade II.
B. Testing And Inspection:
1. Owner is responsible for Quality Assurance. Quality assurance performed by Owner will be used
to validate Quality Control performed by Contractor.
2. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection on concrete:
a. Owner will employ testing agencies to perform testing and inspection on concrete as
specified in Field Quality Control in Part 3 of this specification:
1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of
Contract Documents and perform contractor testing and inspection.
2) See Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Expansion Joint Filler Material:
a. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 5 - 03 3111
1. Expansion Joint Filler Material:
a. Store materials in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Aridus Admixture by US Concrete, Euless, TX www.us-concrete.com/aridus/.
b. BASF (Construction Chemicals Division), Cleveland, OH www.master-builders-
solutions.basf.us/en-us.
c. Bonsal American, Charlotte, NC www.bonsal.com.
d. Concure Systems Admixture by Concure Systems, Phoenix, AZ
www.ConcureSystems.com.
e. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals, Kansas City, KS www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com.
f. Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH www.euclidchemical.com.
g. Fritz-Pak Concrete Admixtures, Dallas, TX www.fritzpak.com.
h. GCP Applied Technologies, Cambridge, MA www.gcpat.com/construction/en-us.
i. ISE Logik Industries, Gulfport, MS www.iselogik.com.
j. Kryton International Inc,. Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada www.kryton.com.
k. L & M Construction Chemicals, Omaha, NE www.lmcc.com.
l. Larsen Weldcrete by Larsen Products Corp, Rockville, MD www.larsenproducts.com.
m. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ www.sikaconstruction.com and Sika Canada, Pointe
Claire, QC www.sika.ca.
n. Unitex, Kansas City, MO www.unitex-chemicals.com.
o. U S Mix Products Co, Denver, CO www.usspec.com.
p. W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com.
B. Performance:
1. Design Criteria: Conform to requirements of ASTM C94/C94M unless specified otherwise:
2. Capacities:
a. For testing purposes, following concrete strengths are required:
1) At 7 days: 70 percent minimum of 28 day strengths.
2) At 28 days: 100 percent minimum of 28 day strengths.
C. Materials:
1. Hydraulic Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M
2. Aggregates:
3. Water: Clear, apparently clean, and potable.
4. Admixtures And Miscellaneous:
a. Fly Ash:
1) Meet requirements of ASTM C618, Class F (or Class C where Class F is not available)
and with loss on ignition (LOI) of three (3) percent maximum.
b. Chemical:
1) No admixture shall contain calcium chloride nor shall calcium chloride be used as an
admixture. All chemical admixtures used shall be from same manufacturer and
compatible with each other.
2) Air Entraining Admixture:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C260/C260M.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
3) Water Reducing Admixture:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type A and containing not more than
0.05 percent chloride ions.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 6 - 03 3111
(1) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
4) Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type D and contain not more than 0.05
percent chloride ions.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
5) High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer):
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type F or G and containing not more
than 0.05 percent chloride ions.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
6) Non-Chloride, Non-Corrosive Accelerating Admixture:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type C or E and containing not more
than 0.05 percent chloride ions.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
7) Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture:
a) Liquid admixture to inhibit corrosion of steel reinforcement in concrete by
introducing proper amount of anodic inhibitor. Admixture shall contain thirty (30)
percent calcium nitrite solution and shall be used where called f or in specifications
or on drawings.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Eucon CIA by Euclid.
(2) DCI or DCI-S by GCP Applied Technologies.
(3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
8) Alkali-Silica Reactivity Inhibiting Admixture:
a) Specially formulated lithium nitrate admixture for prevention of alkali-silica
reactivity (ASR) in concrete. Admixture must have test data indicating
conformance to ASTM C1293.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Eucon Integral ARC by Euclid.
(2) RASIR by W R Grace.
(3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
9) Viscosity Modifying Admixture (VMA):
a) Liquid admixture used to optimize viscosity of Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC).
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide following at dosage rates per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
10) Shrinkage Reducing Admixture (SRA):
a) Liquid admixture specifically designed to reduce drying shrinkage and potential for
cracking.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
11) Rapid Drying Admixture in Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade:
a) Admixture specifically designed to promote rapid drying of co ncrete.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
12) Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA):
a) Liquid, inorganic, ASTM C494/C494M Type S Admixture free of volatile organic
compounds (VOCs); specifically formulated to close capillary systems formed
during concrete placement and to reduce moisture vapor emission and
transmission with no adverse effect on concrete properties or finish flooring.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) MVRA 900 by ISE Logik Industries: www.iselogik.com.
(2) Concure Systems Admixture by Concure Systems, Phoenix, AZ
www.ConcureSystems.com.
(3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
13) Waterproofing Admixture: Admixture formulated to reduce permeability to liquid water,
with no adverse effect on concrete properties:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 7 - 03 3111
a) Functioning by growth of crystals in capillary pores.
b) Permeability of Cured Concrete: No measurable leakage when tested in
accordance with COE CRD-C 48 at 200 feet of head; provide test reports.
c) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) CWPA 800 by ISE Logik Industries: www.iselogik.com.
(2) Krystol Internal Membrane (KIM) by Kryton: www.kryton.com.
(3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Formwork:
1. Meet requirements specified in Section 03 1113:
B. Bonding Agents:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Acrylic Additive by Bonsal American.
b. Day Chem Ad Bond (J-40) by Dayton Superior.
c. Flex-Con by Euclid Chemical Co.
d. Larsen Weldcrete by Larsen Products Corp.
e. Everbond by L & M Construction Chemicals.
f. MasterEmaco A 660 (formally Acryl 60) by BASF.
g. U S Spec Multicoat by U S Mix Products.
h. Intralok by W R Meadows.
i. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
C. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Expansion Joint Filler Material:
a. Design Criteria:
1) Resilient, flexible, non-extruding, expansion-contraction joint filler meeting requirements
of ASTM D1751.
2) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick.
3) Resilience:
a) When compressed to half of original thickness, recover to minimum of seventy (70)
percent of original thickness.
b. Type Two Acceptable Products:
1) Fiber Expansion Joint by W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com.
2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
D. Finishing Material (Exposed Vertical Faces of Foundation and Retaining Walls):
1. Finishing Material available in multiple concrete shades to closely match concrete surface.
2. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Mixture of 1 part cement (using same cement as used in concrete foundations), 1 part sand
with 95 percent passing #50 sieve.
b. RapidSet WunderFixx by CTS Cement Manufacturing Corporation, Cypress, CA
www.rapidset.com.
c. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Concrete Forms:
a. Verify dimensions and spot elevations for locations of forms for concrete footings, stem
walls, building slabs, curbs, gutters, walkways, and drainage systems are correct before
concrete is placed.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 8 - 03 3111
1) Notify Architect of incorrect dimensions or spot elevations in writing.
2) Do not place concrete until corrections are made and verified.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Concrete Mixing:
1. General:
a. All concrete shall be machine mixed.
b. Water gauge shall be provided to deliver exact predetermined amount of water for each
batch.
c. Reliable system must be employed to insure that no less than predetermined amount of
cement goes into each batch.
d. Re-tempering partly set concrete will not be permitted.
2. Transit Mix:
a. Transit mix concrete may be used provided it conforms to Specifications and tests herein
described and ASTM C94/C94M.
b. Central plant producing concrete and equipment transporting it are suitable for production
and transportation of controlled concrete and plant is currently approved by loc al state DOT.
c. Maximum elapsed time between time of introduction of water and placing shall be one (1)
hour.
d. Minimum time of mixing shall be one (1) minute per cubic yard after all material, including
water, has been placed in drum, and drum shall be revers ed for an additional two (2)
minutes.
e. Mixing water shall be added only in presence of Inspecting Engineer or inspector employed
by Testing Agency.
f. Trucks shall not be overloaded in excess of rated capacity as recommended by
manufacturer.
3. Cold Weather Concreting Procedures:
a. General Requirements:
1) Materials and equipment required for heating and protection of concrete shall be
approved and available at Project site before beginning cold weather concreting.
2) Forms, reinforcement, metallic embedments, and fillers shall be free from snow, ice,
and frost. Surfaces that will be in contact with newly placed concrete, including sub-
grade materials, shall be 35 deg F (2 deg C) minimum at time of concrete placement.
3) Thaw sub-grade 6 inches (150 mm) deep minimum before beginning concrete
placement. If necessary, re-compact thawed material.
4) Use no frozen materials or materials containing ice.
5) See ACI 306.1 ‘Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting’ for additional
requirements.
4. Hot Weather Concreting Procedures:
a. General:
1) Maximum concrete temperature allowed is 90 deg F (32 deg C) in hot weather.
2) Cool aggregate and subgrades by sprinkling.
3) Avoid cement over 140 deg F (60 deg C).
4) Use cold mixing water or ice.
5) Use fog spray or evaporation retardant to lessen rapid evaporation from concrete
surface.
6) See ACI 305.1 ‘Specification for Hot Weather Concreting’ for additional requirements.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Earthwork Preparation:
a. Aggregate base and subgrade:
1) Prepare aggregate base as specified in Section 31 1123.
2) Prepare natural soil subgrade as specified in Section 31 2213.
3) Prepare fill subgrade as specified in Section 31 2323.
2. Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pipes, conduits, and other accessories required by Divisions 22,
23, and 26 shall be installed and inspected before placing concrete.
3. Install inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pipes, conduits, and other accessories furnished under
other Sections to be installed as part of work of this Section:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 9 - 03 3111
a. Tie anchor bolts for hold-down anchors and columns securely to reinforcing steel.
C. Removal:
1. Remove water and debris from space to be placed:
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Placing Concrete:
1. General:
a. Place as soon after mixing as possible.
b. Deposit as nearly as possible in final position.
c. No concrete shall be deposited in water.
d. Placing of concrete shall be continuous until panel or section is complete.
e. Compact concrete in forms by vibrating and other means where required.
1) Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcing bars (Consolidation not required in
concrete around reinforcing bars with Mix Type G).
2) Use and type of vibrators shall conform to ACI 309.
f. Form vertical surfaces full depth. Do not allow concrete to flow out from under forms in any
degree into landscaped areas.
g. Consolidate concrete thoroughly.
h. Do not embed aluminum in concrete.
i. Do not use contaminated, deteriorated, or re-tempered concrete.
j. Avoid accumulation of hardened concrete.
k. Dusting with cement not permitted.
2. Joints:
a. Control Joints (Contraction Joints):
1) Form control joints with early-entry, dry-cut saws as soon as final trowel operations are
complete, and joints can be cut without raveling.
b. Expansion Joints:
1) Expansion joints in Concrete Paving are specified in Section 32 1313.
2) Install so top of expansion joint material is 1/4 inch (6 mm) below finished surface of
concrete.
3) No expansion joint required between curbs and sidewalks parallel to curb.
4) Provide expansion joints at ends of exterior site concrete elements that are
perpendicular to and terminate at curbs, building foundations or other concrete
elements (i.e. sidewalks, mow strips, aprons).
5) Provide expansion joints between sidewalks that are parallel, and adjacent, to storage
building or main building.
6) Provide expansion joints around perimeter of concrete slab on grade at mechanical
enclosure, around perimeter of slab on grade at dumpster enclosure and at top and
bottom of exterior stairs.
7) Table Two:
8) Seal expansion joints as specified in Section 07 9213 for following areas:
a) Between entryway slabs and building foundations.
b) Between sidewalks and building foundations.
c. Rough:
1) Top of building slab to receive setting bed for ceramic or paver tile.
d. Trowel Finish:
1) Steel trowel slab after concrete has set enough to avoid bringing water and fines to
surface.
2) Perform troweling with power-driven trowels with exception of areas inaccessible to
power-driven trowels, which may be hand-troweled.
3) Continue troweling passes and re-straightening with 10 foot (3 meter) highway
straightedge until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and
appearance.
4) Apply burnished, burned-out trowel finish.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 10 - 03 3111
B. Curing:
1. Membrane Concrete Curing:
a. As specified in Section 09 3923 'Membrane Concrete Curing'.
b. Follow Manufacturer’s written instructions for preparation, application rates, placement, and
cleanup:
1) Apply product in areas where Water Concrete Curing is NOT used.
2) Apply as soon as troweling on interior concrete is complete.
3) Apply as soon as brooming or finishing of exterior concrete is complete.
4) Spraying application is required.
5) Do not dilute or thin product.
6) Do not apply when temperature of concrete is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
7) Apply uniformly without puddles or ponding.
8) Do not apply before bleed water has dissipated.
9) Do not apply over standing water.
C. Polished Concrete Finishing:
1. In Areas as shown on Contract Documents:
a. Chemical Densifier and Polished Concrete Finishing:
1) See Section 03 3543 for application of chemical densifier and polished concrete
finishing.
D. Tolerances:
1. General:
a. Tolerances shall conform to requirements of ACI 117 or CSA A23.1/A23.2, except where
specified differently:
1) Floor test surfaces shall be measured and reported within seventy two (72) hours after
completion of slab concrete finishing operations and before removal of any supporting
shores to eliminate any curling effect F-numbers.
2. Local Flatness / Levelness of Interior Slabs:
a. Carpet and Tile Areas:
1) Specified Overall Value of FF25 / FL20 and Minimum Local Value of FF15 / FL13 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E1155.
2) Specified Overall Value of FF30 / FL20 and Minimum Local Value of FF18 / FL13 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E1155 in ceramic, resilient or vinyl tiled areas.
3) Used on building slabs to be covered by carpet a nd tile as shown on Contract
Drawings. Verify and coordinate with Finish Schedule.
4) Remedy For Out-of-Tolerance Building Slabs:
a) Sections of building slabs which do not meet specified tolerances but are within ten
(10) percent of specified tolerances, may be corrected by grinding or filling, at
Owner's option.
b) Remove and replace sections of slabs measuring outside specified correctable
tolerances.
c) Carpet areas: If floor leveling compounds or concrete patching compounds are
required to bring floor into specified tolerances, they will be provided by Owner in
conjunction with carpet installation and back-charged to Contractor.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not
limited to the following:
1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3.5 CLEANING
A. General:
1. Curing:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete - 11 - 03 3111
a. Clean tools, equipment as directed by Manufacturer's instructions .
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Concrete:
1. Protect concrete that has not received its initial set from precipitation to avoid excess water in mix
and unsatisfactory surface finish.
2. Do not allow materials resulting from construction activities, which will affect concrete or
application of finish floor systems adversely, to come in contact with interior concrete slabs.
3. Protect interior concrete floors from stains, paint, mortar and other construction activities.
B. Curing:
1. Restrict foot or vehicle traffic as curing membrane dries as recommended be Manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
B L A N K P A G E
Table of Contents - 1 - 06 0000
D I V I S I O N 06: W O O D, P L A S T I C S, A N D C O M P O S I T E S
06 1000 R O U G H C A R P E N T R Y
06 1011 WOOD FASTENINGS
06 1100 WOOD FRAMING
06 2000 F I N I S H C A R P E N T R Y
06 2024 DOOR, FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION
06 2210 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM
06 4000 A R C H I T E C T U R A L W O O D W O R K
06 4512 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Wood Fastenings - 1 - 06 1011
SECTION 06 1011
WOOD FASTENINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Quality of wood fastening methods and materials used for Rough Carpentry unless specified
otherwise.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Furnishing and installing of other fasteners are specified in individual Sections where installed.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards;
1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM A153/A153M-16a, ‘Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware’.
b. ASTM D3498-18, ‘Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber
Framing for Floor Systems’.
c. ASTM F1667-18a, ‘Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples ’.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's literature on framing anchors and powder actuated fasteners.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit diameter and lengths of fasteners proposed for use on Project. If length or diameter
of proposed fasteners differ from specified fasteners, also include technical and engineering
data for proposed fasteners including, but not limited to:
1) Adjusted fastener spacing where using proposed fasteners and,
2) Adjusted number of fasteners necessary to provide connection capacity equivalent to
specified fasteners.
b. Submit on powder-actuated fasteners other than those specified in Contract Documents
showing design criteria equivalents at each application.
c. Show type, quantity, and installation location of framing anchors. Where necessary,
reference Drawing details, etc, for installation locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description:
1. Nail Terminology:
a. When following nail terms are used in relation to this Project, following lengths and
diameters will be understood. Refer to nails of other dimensions by actual length and
diameter, not by one of listed terms:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Wood Fastenings - 2 - 06 1011
Nail Term Length Diameter Length Diameter
8d Box 2-1/2 inches 0.113 inch 63.5 mm 2.827 mm
8d Common 2-1/2 inches 0.131 inch 63.5 mm 3.389 mm
10d Box 3 inches 0.128 inch 76.2 mm 3.251 mm
10d Common 3 inches 0.148 inch 76.2 mm 3.759 mm
16d Box 3-1/2 inches 0.135 inch 88.9 mm 3.411 mm
16d Sinker 3-1/4 inches 0.148 inch 82.6 mm 3.759 mm
16d Common 3-1/2 inches 0.162 inch 88.9 mm 4.115 mm
B. Materials:
1. Wood fastener list:
a. Provide VMR Suppliers with wood fastener list.
2. Fasteners:
a. General:
1) Fasteners for preservative treated and fire-retardant-treated wood shall be of hot dipped
zinc-coated galvanized steel, stainless steel, silicon bronzed, or copper. Coating
weights for zinc-coated fasteners shall be in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
b. Nails:
1) Meet requirements of ASTM F1667.
2) Unless noted otherwise, nails listed on Drawings or in Specifications shall be common
nail diameter, except 16d nails, which shall be box diameter.
c. Wood Screws:
1) SDS Screws:
a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of
categories.
(1) SDS Screws by Simpson Strong Tie Co, Dublin, CA www.strongtie.com.
2) All Other: Standard type and make for job requirements.
d. Powder-Actuated Fasteners:
1) Type One Quality Standard: Hilti X-DNI 62P8.
2) Manufacturers:
a) Hilti, Tulsa, OK www.us.hilti.com.
b) Redhead Division of ITW, Wood Dale, IL www.itw-redhead.com and Markham,
ON www.itwconstruction.ca.
c) Equals as approved by Architect through shop drawing submittal before
installation. See Section 01 6200.
3. Adhesives:
a. Construction Mastics:
1) Meet requirements of ‘APA-The Engineered Wood Association’ Specification AFG-01 or
ASTM D3498.
2) Use phenol-resorcinol type for use on pressure treated wood products.
4. Framing Anchors:
a. Framing anchors and associated fasteners in contact with preservative hot dipped zinc-
coated galvanized steel or stainless steel. Do not use stainless steel items with galvanized
items.
b. Type Two Acceptable Products:
1) KC Metals Inc, San Jose, CA www.kcmetals.com.
2) Simpson Strong Tie Co, Dublin, CA www.strongtie.com.
3) United Steel Products Co Inc (USP), Montgomery, MN www.uspconnectors.com.
4) Equals as approved by Architect through shop drawing submittal before installation.
See Section 01 6200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Secure one Manufacturer approved fastener in each hole of framing anchor that bears on framing
member unless approved otherwise in writing by Architect.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Wood Fastenings - 3 - 06 1011
B. Provide washers with bolt heads and with nuts bearing on wood.
END OF SECTION
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Wood Framing - 1 - 06 1100
SECTION 06 1100
WOOD FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install wood framing and blocking as described in Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. American Lumber Standard Committee (ALSC) (Maintains NIST standard):
a. Voluntary Product Standard:
1) PS 20-15, 'American Softwood Lumber Standard'.
2. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), U. S. Department of Commerce:
a. Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 20-15, 'American Softwood Lumber Standard'.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference held jointly with Section 06 1636.
a. Schedule pre-installation conference immediately before beginning framing work.
b. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following:
1) Equipment and gypsum board blocking in wood framed walls.
2) Rough opening.
3) Nails and nailing requirements.
4) Connections.
2. Participate in pre-installation conference held jointly with Section 08 4113.
a. Schedule pre-installation conference for one (1) week before scheduled installation of
storefront system.
b. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following:
1) Rough opening requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Test And Evaluation Reports:
a. Technical and engineering data on nails to be set by nailing guns for Architect's approval of
types proposed to be used as equivalents to specified hand set nails and adjusted number
and spacing of pneumatically-driven nails to provide equivalent connection capacity.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Protect lumber and sheathing and keep under cover in transit and at job site.
2. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Store lumber and sheathing on level racks and keep free of ground to avoid warping.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Wood Framing - 2 - 06 1100
2. Stack to insure proper ventilation and drainage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLIERS
A. Suppliers:
1. Category Three Approved Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and
Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements:
a. BMC, West Jordan, UT. www.BuildWithBMC.com. Contact Par Palmer:
1) Office: (801) 224-0541.
2) Mobile: (801) 376-9853.
3) E-Mail: Par.Palmer@BuildWithBMC.com or www.BuildWithBMC.com.
b. J. M. Thomas Forest Products, Ogden, UT. www.thomasforest.com. Contact Tom Karren:
1) Office: (800) 962-8780.
2) FAX: 801-782-9652.
3) E-Mail: tom@thomasforest.com.
c. Shelter Products, Inc., Portland, OR www.shelter-products.com. Contact Mike Running:
1) Office: (800) 662-3612.
2) Cell: NA.
3) FAX: (503) 238-2663.
4) E-Mail: mrunning@shelter-products.com.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Dimension Lumber:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Meet requirements of PS 20 and National Grading Rules for softwood dimension lumber.
b. Bear grade stamp of WWPA, SPIB, or other association recognized by American Lumber
Standards Committee identifying species of lumber by grade mark or by Certificate of
Inspection.
c. Lumber 2 inches (50 mm) or less in nominal thickness shall not exceed 19 percent in
moisture content at time of fabrication and installation and be stamped 'S-DRY', 'K-D', or
'MC15'.
d. Preservative Treated Plates / Sills:
1) 2x4 (38 mm by 64 mm): Standard and better Douglas Fir, Southern Pine, or HemFir, or
StrandGuard by iLevel by Weyerhaeuser Boise, ID www.ilevel.com. (LSL 1.3 E)
2) 2x6 (38 mm by 140 mm) And Wider: No. 2 or or MSR 1650f - 1.5e Douglas Fir,
Southern Pine, HemFir, or StrandGuard by iLevel by Weyerhaeuser, Boise, ID
www.ilevel.com. (LSL 1.3 E).
B. See Contract Drawings for additional requirements.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Blocking:
1. Sound lumber without splits, warps, wane, loose knots, or knots larger than 1/2 inch (13 mm).
B. Furring Strips:
1. Utility or better.
C. Sill Sealer:
1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by width of plate.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Wood Framing - 3 - 06 1100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Use preservative treated wood for wood members in contact with concrete or masonry, including
wall, sill, and ledger plates, door and window subframes and bucks, etc.
B. Interface With Other Work:
1. Coordinate with other Sections for location of blocking required for installation of equipment and
building specialties. Do not allow installation of gypsum board until required blocking is in place.
2. Where manufactured items are to be installed in framing, provide rough openings of dimensions
within tolerances required by manufacturers of such items. Confirm dimensions where not shown
on Contract Drawings.
C. Tolerances:
1. Walls:
a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 20 feet (6 meters), non-cumulative in length of wall.
b. 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 meters) with 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum in height of wall.
c. Distances between parallel walls shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum along length and height
of wall.
D. Floors:
1. Place with crown side up.
2. Provide accurately fitted header and trimmer joists of same size as regular joists around floor
openings, unless detailed otherwise, and support by steel joist hangers.
3. Double joists under partitions that parallel run of joists.
E. Walls:
1. Openings: Single, bearing stud supporting header and one adjacent (king) stud continuous
between top and bottom plates, unless shown otherwise.
2. Corners And Partition Intersections: Triple studs.
3. Top Plates In Bearing Partitions: Doubled or tripled and lapped. Stagger joints at least 48 inches
(1 200 mm).
4. Stud Walls To Masonry. Use one of the following methods:
a. Connect with 1/2 inch (13 mm) machine bolts 6 inches (150 mm) from top, 6 inches (150
mm) from bottom, and 48 inches (1 200 mm) maximum on center. Use three bolts minimum
in height of 6 foot (1 800 mm) or higher wall.
b. Secure wood to masonry using continuous 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum bead of construction
adhesive and powder actuated fasteners installed at 32 inches (800 mm) on center
minimum.
5. Sill Plates:
a. Shear Walls And Bearing Walls:
1) Provide specified anchor 12 inches (300 mm) maximum and 4 inches (100 mm)
minimum from each end of each plate.
2) Shear Walls: Fasten with anchor bolts embedded in concrete or with screw anchors.
3) Bearing Walls: Fasten with anchor bolts embedded in concrete, or with screw anchors
or expansion bolts in drilled holes.
b. Non-Structural Walls: Fasten with powder actuated fasteners.
c. In addition to requirements of paragraphs 'a' and 'b' above, set sill plates of interior walls
measuring less than 36 inches (900 mm) in length in solid bed of specified construction
adhesive, except where sill sealer is used.
d. Install specified seal sealer under sill plates of exterior walls of main building and of
acoustically insulated interior walls.
e. Masonry Wall Plates:
1) Anchor 2x6 and 2x8 wall plates to top of block walls with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter
anchor bolts at 32 inches (800 mm) on center unless noted otherwise.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Wood Framing - 4 - 06 1100
2) Set plates on masonry bearing walls true and level to provide full bearing. Use mortar
as specified in Division 04 for leveling if leveling is required.
6. Nailing:
a. Stud to plate (coordinate with Contract Drawings):
2 by 4 inch nominal 38 by 89 mm End nail, two 16d OR toe nail, four 8d
2 by 6 inch nominal 38 by 140 mm End nail, three 16d OR toe nail, four 8d
2 by 8 inch nominal 38 by 184 mm End nail, four 16d OR toe nail, six 8d
2 by 10 inch nominal 38 by 235 mm End nail, five 16d OR toe nail, six 8d
1-3/4 by 5-1/2 inch LVL 44 by 140 mm LVL End nail, three 16d OR toe nail, four 8d
1-3/4 by 7-1/4 inch LVL 44 by 184 mm LVL End nail, four 16d OR toe nail, six 8d
1-3/4 by 9-1/4 inch LVL 44 by 235 mm LVL End nail, five 16d OR toe nail, six 8d
1-3/4 by 11-1/4 inch LVL 44 by 286 mm LVL End nail, six 16d OR toe nail eight 8d
b. Top plates: Spiked together, 16d, 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
c. Top plates: Laps, lap members 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum and nail with 16d nails 4
inches (100 mm) on center
d. Top plates: Intersections, three 16d.
e. Backing And Blocking: Three 8d, each end.
f. Corner studs and angles: 16d, 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
F. Accessory / Equipment Mounting And Gypsum Board Back Blocking (nailers) for Wood Framing):
1. Furnish and install blocking in wood framing required for hardware, specialties, equipment,
accessories, and mechanical and electrical items, etc.
2. Furnish and install back blocking in wood framing required for joints in gypsum wallboard.
a. Install back blocking between I-joist framing members with equivalent of Simpson Z2 clips
attached with four 10d x 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nails at each end, two into ‘I’ joist and two into
blocking.
b. Attach back blocking at trusses, stick framing, or walls with two 10d nails in each end of
each piece of blocking.
G. Accessory / Equipment Mounting And Standing & Running Trim Blocking (nailers) for Metal Framing:
1. Furnish and install blocking in wood framing required for hardware, specialties, equipment,
accessories, and mechanical and electrical items, etc.
2. Attach blocking not installed with clips with two fasteners in each end of each piece of blocking.
H. Furring Strips:
1. On Wood or Steel: Nail or screw as required to secure firmly.
a. Ceiling:
1) Attach furring strips to the underside of structural elements with #8 wood screws, of
length to penetrate wood framing 1 inch (25 mm) minimum.
2. On Concrete or Masonry:
a. Back up furring strips on exterior walls or walls in contact with earth with 15 lb (6.8 kg) felt
strip.
b. Nail at 12 inches (300 mm) on center maximum.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation - 1 - 06 2024
SECTION 06 2024
DOOR, FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install sealants for caulking door frames as described in Contract Documents.
2. Furnish and install insulation in doorframes as described in Contract Documents.
B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:
1. Flush wood doors.
2. Hollow metal door frames.
3. Finish hardware.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Grouting of frames installed in masonry walls.
2. Section 08 1416: 'Flush Wood Doors'.
3. Section 07 2116: ' Blanket Insulation' for quality of fiberglass insulation.
4. Section 07 9213: ' Elastomeric Joint Sealants' for quality of sealants.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference.
1. Participate in pre-installation conference.
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following:
a. Schedule conference after hardware has been delivered to site and organized into hardware
groups by door, but before installation of hardware.
b. Check for appropriate blocking and for correct hardware models and fasteners for
substrates.
c. Review submittals and set of Manufacturer's installation, adjustment, and maintenance
instructions submitted under Section 08 7101.
d. Review use of crowbar or other prying devices are not permitted to be used to set door
frame into wall opening.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Installer Report:
a. Report verifying correct operation and adjustment of installed hardware.
2. Special Procedure Submittals:
a. Copy of 'Installation Guide for Doors & Hardware' by Door & Hardware Institute. Guide may
be obtained from Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Wood Doors:
a. Do not have doors delivered to building site until after plaster, cement, and taping compound
are dry.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation - 2 - 06 2024
b. If doors are to be stored at job-site for more than one week, seal top and bottom edges if not
factory sealed.
2. Metal Frames:
a. Examine door frames and note damage upon acceptance.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Wood Doors:
a. Store flat on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated building.
1) Cover to keep clean but allow air circulation
b. Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or across other
surfaces.
c. Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity or sudden changes therein
1) Condition doors to average prevailing humidity of locality before hanging.
2. Metal Frames:
a. Protect metal frames from damage before and during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Site Tolerances:
a. Squareness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from top edge to opposite top edge.
b. Plumbness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from top of jamb to bottom of jamb.
c. Alignment: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from plane of left side face of jamb to right side face of jamb.
d. Twist: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) across throat of jamb plane measured across each face to plane
of opposite jamb throat.
e. Finished Clearance Between Door And Frame:
1) 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) at head and hinge jamb plus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) maximum
2) 1/8 inch (3 mm) at strike jamb plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) maximum.
3) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) to top of finished floor surface or 1/4 inch (6 mm) to top of threshold,
plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) maximum.
2. Set frame in location and level head.
a. Use of crowbar or other prying device to set door frame into wall opening will damage door
frames and are not permitted to be used.
3. Equalize with adjustable floor anchor.
4. Set spreaders and fasten jambs to floor and wall.
a. Wood spreaders shall be square, fabricated from lumber one inch minimum thick, be same
length as door opening at header, and same depth as frame.
b. Cut notches for frame stops.
c. Do not remove spreaders until frames are permanently anchored in wall.
d. Use one spreader at base of frame and another at strike level.
e. Do not use temporary spreaders welded to base of jambs during installation of frame.
5. Fill gap between frame and framing with urethane foam or tightly -packed fiberglass insulation. If
urethane foam is used, foam interior of frames before installing frame. Trim excess before
installation of frame.
6. Caulking:
a. Caulk around both sides of frames of doors receiving acoustical seals with specified sealant.
b. Caulk around both sides of frames installed in exposed masonry walls with specified sealant.
B. Doors:
1. When Project is completed, doors shall not bind, stick, or be mounted so as to cause future
hardware difficulties.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation - 3 - 06 2024
2. Do not impair utility or structural strength of door in fitting of door, applying hardware, or cutting
and altering door louvers, panels, or other special details.
C. Hardware:
1. General:
a. Install using set of Manufacturer's installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions
submitted with hardware under Section 08 7101. Follow as closely as possible.
b. Mount closers on jamb stop side of door in parallel arm configuration where it is physically
possible to do so and not damage or hinder operation of door or closer.
2. Hardware for Wood Doors:
a. If doors are not factory-machined, use hardware templates furnished by Hardware
Manufacturer when mounting hardware.
b. Set hinges flush with edge surface. Be sure that hinges are set in a straight line to prevent
distortion.
c. Mount door latches high in strike plate opening so when door later settles, latch will not bind.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests:
1. Arrange to have keys brought to Project site and, in meeting attended by local representatives
and Architect, test every new key and locking mechanism.
B. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not
limited to the following:
1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no
additional cost to the Owner.
2. Door frames:
a. Door frames damaged by use of crowbar or other prying devices to set door frames shall be
repaired or replaced at no additional cost to Owner.
3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Instruction of Owner:
1. Using Owner's Operations And Maintenance Manual, explain keying systems at same time keys
and locking mechanisms are tested.
B. Key Delivery:
1. Immediately before Final Acceptance Meeting, turn change keys over to Owner properly
organized, tagged, and placed in new or existing key cabinet.
END OF SECTION
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Miscellaneous Wood Trim - 1 - 06 2210
SECTION 06 2210
MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install wood trim not specified elsewhere as described in Contract Documents.
2. Section 06 4512: 'Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim'.
3. Section 09 9324: ‘Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood’.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada
/ Woodwork Institute, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac F alls, VA www.awinet.org.
a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 2nd Edition, 2014.
B. Definitions:
1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or
Premium Grade:
a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural
woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project’s quality of materials,
workmanship, or installation.
2. Plain-Sawn: A hardwood figure developed by sawing a log lengthwise at a tangent to the annual
growth rings. It appears as U-shaped or straight markings in the board’s face.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Samples:
a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish:
1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample
available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished
hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324.
2) Design Criteria:
a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match
Owner provided stain color selected for Project.
b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish
provided.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Source Quality Control Submittals:
a. Samples:
1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish:
a) Owner will provide Control Sample for finish.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Miscellaneous Wood Trim - 2 - 06 2210
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Design Criteria:
1. General:
a. Meet requirements of Section 06 4001 for general standards for materials and fabrication of
Architectural Woodwork.
2. Clear Finished Hardwood:
a. Match materials specified in Section 06 4512.
b. Match finish specified in Section 06 4512 and match Owner selected sample as specified in
Section 09 9324.
3. Clear Finished Paneling: Match materials specified in Sections 06 4216.
4. Opaque Finished Hardwood: Hardwood allowed by AWS Custom Grade.
5. Opaque Finished Softwood: Solid stock Pine, C or better, S4S.
6. Opaque Finished Paneling: Paneling allowed by AWS Custom Grade.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections:
1. Clear Finished Hardwood:
a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324.
PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim - 1 - 06 4512
SECTION 06 4512
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Chair rails.
2. Hardwood trim for wall covering.
3. Wood trim at ceiling trim.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 1429: Interior Flush Wood Doors.
2. Section 09 9324: ‘Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood’.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada
/ Woodwork Institute, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org.
a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 2nd Edition, 2014.
B. Definitions:
1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or
Premium Grade.
a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural
woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project’s quality of materials,
workmanship, or installation.
2. Plain-Sawn: A hardwood figure developed by sawing a log lengthwise at a tangent to the annual
growth rings. It appears as U-shaped or straight markings in the board’s face.
3. Running Trim: Generally combined in the term “standing and running trim” and refers to random,
longer length trims delivered to the jobsite (e.g., baseboard, chair rail, crown molding).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Include materials used, standing and running trim profiles, joint details, and hardware.
2. Samples:
a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish:
1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample
available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished
hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324.
2) Design Criteria:
a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match
Owner provided stain color selected for Project.
b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish
provided.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Source Quality Control Submittals:
a. Samples:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim - 2 - 06 4512
1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish:
a) Owner will provide Control Sample for finish.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators.
D. Performance / Design Criteria: Conform to requirements of Section 06 4001 ‘Common Architectural
Woodwork Requirements’.
1. Glue: Waterproof and of best quality.
2. Factory-finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324.
E. Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim:
1. Interior Hardwood For Transparent Finish:
a. Design Criteria:
1) Solid wood shall be plain sawn Red Oak.
2) Paneling shall be panel product with plain sliced Red Oak veneer.
3) Finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324.
b. Match existing Project Color Scheme:
1) Control Sample provided by Owner:
a) LDS 95 - Control Sample will be existing wood item from Project.
2. Interior Wood For Opaque, Painted Finish:
a. Applies to ceiling trim only.
b. Solid wood shall be any species allowed by AWS Custom grade.
F. Shelves:
1. Conform to applicable requirements of Sections 06 4001 and 06 4114.
2. Use 3/4 inch (19 mm) Kortron or Melamine faced Panel Product with hot glued 3 mm thick PVC
edge banding with eased edges. Apply banding on exposed edges with one inch (25 mm) return
onto unexposed edges. Edge banding color to match Panel Product.
1.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections:
1. Clear Finished Hardwood:
a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324.
PART 2 - EXECUTION Not Used
END OF SECTION
Table of Contents - 1 - 07 0000
D I V I S I O N 07: T H E R M A L A N D M O I S T U R E P R O T E C T I O N
07 2000 T H E R M A L P R O T E C T I O N
07 2116 BLANKET INSULATION
07 9000 J O I N T P R O T E C T I O N
07 9213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Blanket Insulation - 1 - 07 2116
SECTION 07 2116
BLANKET INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install faced thermal and acoustic batt insulation as described in Contract
Documents.
2. Quality of insulation used in speaker enclosures.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 2024: 'Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation' for furnishing and installing of
insulation in hollow metal door frames.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM C665-17, ‘Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing'.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Insulation shall be manufactured and installed in compliance with International Building Code
(IBC) or other applicable building codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Insulation:
a. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Certainteed Corp, Valley Forge, PA www.certainteed.com.
2) FiberTEK, Salt Lake City, UT www.fibertekinsulation.com.
3) Guardian Fiberglass, Greer, SC www.guardianbp.com.
4) Johns Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com.
5) Knauf Fiber Glass, Shelbyville, IN www.knaufusa.com.
6) Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH www.owens-corning.com.
7) Thermafiber, Wabash, IL www.thermafiber.com.
b. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.
B. Materials:
1. Thermal And Acoustic Insulation:
a. Order insulation by 'R' value rather than 'U' value, rating, or thickness, either 16 or 24 inches
(400 or 600 mm) wide according to framing spacing.
b. Faced Insulation:
1) Kraft faced meeting requirements of ASTM C665, Type II, Class C.
2) Foil faced meeting requirements of ASTM C665, Type III.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Blanket Insulation - 2 - 07 2116
a) Class B: Enclosed insulation.
c. 'R' Value Required:
1) Acoustically Insulated Ceilings:
a) Enclosed Spaces: Fill framed cavity with batt of appropriate thickness.
b) Unenclosed Spaces: R-19.
c) Unenclosed Spaces above Offices and Restrooms: R-30.
2) Wood Wall Stud Framing:
R-11 3-1/2 inches deep 89 mm deep
R-19 5-1/2 inches deep 140 mm deep
R-25 7-1/4 inches deep 184 mm deep
R-30 9-1/4 inches deep 235 mm deep
R-38 11-1/4 inches deep 286 mm deep
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Leave no gaps in insulation envelope.
2. If two layers of insulation are used to attain required 'R' value, only layer towards interior of
building shall have facing.
3. Provide minimum clearance around recessed lighting fixtures as approved by local code.
B. In Framing:
1. Install insulation behind plumbing and wiring, around duct and vent line penet rations, and in
similar places.
2. Fit ends of batts snug against top and bottom plates.
3. Fit batts snug against stud framing at each side.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 1 - 07 9213
SECTION 07 9213
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install sealants not specified to be furnished and installed under other Sections.
2. Quality of sealants to be used on Project not specified elsewhere, including submittal, material,
and installation requirements.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Removing existing sealants specified in Sections where work required.
2. Furnishing and installing of sealants is specified in Sections specifying work to receive new
sealants.
C. Products Furnished But not Installed Under This Section:
1. Interior Ceramic Tile Joint Sealants:
D. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 3013: 'Ceramic Tiling'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. Sealant Types and Classifications:
a. ASTM Specifications:
1) Type:
a) Type S: Single-component sealant.
b) Type M: Multi-component sealant.
2) Grade:
a) Grade P: Pourable or self-leveling sealant used for horizontal traffic joints.
b) Grade NS: Non-sag or gunnable sealant used for vertical and non-traffic joints.
3) Classes: Represent movement capability in percent of joint width.
a) Class 100/50: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion or cohesion under cyclic
movement shall withstand of at least 100 percent increase and decrease of at least
50 percent of joint width as measured at time of application.
b) Class 50: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion or cohesion under cyclic
movement shall withstand increase and decrease of at least 50 percent of joint
width as measured at time of application.
c) Class 25: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion or cohesion under cyclic
movement shall withstand increase and decrease of at least 25 percent of joint
width as measured at time of application.
d) Class 12: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement shall withstand increase and decrease of at least 12 percent of joint
width as measured at time of application.
4) Use:
a) T (Traffic): Sealant designed for use in joints in pedestrian and vehicular traffic
areas such as walkways, plazas, decks and parking garages.
b) NT (Non-Traffic): Sealant designed for use in joints in non-traffic areas.
c) I (Immersion): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested by immersion
(Immersion rated sealant applications require primer).
d) M (Mortar): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested on mortar
specimens.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 2 - 07 9213
e) G (Glass): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested on glass
specimens.
f) A (Aluminum): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested on aluminum
specimens.
g) O (Other): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested on substrates
other than standard substrates, being glass, aluminum, mortar.
2. Silicone: Any member of family of polymeric products whose molecular backbone is made up of
alternating silicon and oxygen atoms and which has pendant hydrocarbon groups attached to
silicon atoms. Used primarily as a sealant. Offers excellent resistance to water and large
variations in temperature (minus 100 deg F to + 600 deg F) (minus 73.3 deg C to + 316 deg C).
B. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM C920-14a, ‘Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants’.
b. ASTM C1193-16, ‘Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants’.
c. ASTM C1330-18, ‘Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold
Liquid Applied Sealants’.
d. ASTM C1481-12(2017) 'Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants with Exterior Insulation &
Finish Systems (EIFS)'.
e. ASTM D5893/D5893M-16, ‘Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component,
Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements’.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling:
1. Schedule work so waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes are installed after
sealants, unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing.
2. Ensure sealants are cured before covering with other materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements.
b. Manufacturer's literature for each Product.
c. Schedule showing joints requiring sealants. Show also backing and primer to be used.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Certificates:
a. Manufacturer's Certificate:
1) Certify products are suitable for intended use and products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
2) Certificate from Manufacturer indicating date of manufacture.
2. Manufacturers’ Instructions:
a. Manufacturer's installation recommendations for each Product.
b. Manufacturer's installation for completing sealant intersections when different materials are
joined.
c. Manufacturer's installation for removing existing sealants and preparing joints for new
sealant.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum ten (10) years documented experience.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 3 - 07 9213
2. Applicator Qualifications:
a. Company specializing in performing work of this section.
b. Provide if requested, reference of projects with minimum three (3) years documented
experience, minimum three (3) successfully completed projects of similar scope and
complexity, and approved by manufacturer.
c. Designate one (1) individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during
installation.
B. Preconstruction Testing:
1. Pre-construction testing is not required when sealant manufacturer can furnish data acceptable to
Architect based on previous testing for materials matching those of the Work.
C. Mockups:
1. Provide mockups including sealant and joint accessories to illustrate installation quality a nd color
if requested by Architect or Project Manager.
a. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
1. Deliver and keep in original containers until ready for use.
2. Inspect for damage or deteriorated materials.
B. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Handle, store, and apply materials in compliance with applicable regulations and material safety
data sheets (MSDS).
2. Handle to prevent inclusion of foreign matter, damage by water, or breakage.
3. Store in a cool dry location, but never under 40 deg F (4 deg C) or subjected to sustained
temperatures exceeding 90 deg F (32 deg C) or as per Manufacturer's written recommendations.
4. Do not use sealants that have exceeded shelf life of product.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Do not install sealant during inclement weather or when such conditions are expected. Allow wet
surfaces to dry.
2. Follow Manufacturer’s temperature recommendations for installing sealants.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Signed warranties against adhesive and cohesive failure of sealant and against infiltration of
water and air through sealed joint for period of three (3) years from date of Substantial
Completion.
a. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials.
b. Applicator’s standard warranty covering workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Dow Corning Corp., Midland, MI www.dowcorning.com.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 4 - 07 9213
b. Franklin International, Inc. Columbus, OH www.titebond.com.
c. GE Sealants & Adhesives (see Momentive Performance Materials Inc.).
d. Laticrete International Inc., Bethany, CT www.laticrete.com.
e. Momentive Performance Materials Inc. (formally GE Sealants & Adhesives), Huntersville,
NC www.ge.com/silicones.
f. Sherwin-Williams, Cleveland, OH www.sherwin-williams.com.
g. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ www.sikaconstruction.com or Sika Canada Inc, Pointe
Claire, QC www.sika.ca.
h. Tremco, Beachwood, OH www.tremcosealants.com or Tremco Ltd, Toronto, ON (800) 363-
3213.
B. Materials:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Compliance: Meet or exceed requirements of these standards:
1) ASTM C920: Elastomeric joint sealant performance standard.
2) ASTM D5893/D5893M: Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete Pavements.
b. Comply with Manufacturer’s ambient condition requirements.
c. Sealants must meet Manufacturer's shelf-life requirements.
d. Sealants must adhere to and be compatible with specified substrates.
e. Sealants shall be stable when exposed to UV, joint movements, and environment prevailing
at project location.
f. Primers (Concrete, stone, masonry, and other nonporous surfaces typically do not require a
primer. Aluminum and other nonporous surfaces except glass require use of a primer.
Installer Option to use Adhesion Test to determine if primer is required or use primer called
out in related sections):
1) Adhesion Test:
a) Apply silicone sealant to small area and perform adhesion test to determine if
primer is required to achieve adequate adhesion. If necessary, apply primer at
rate and in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. See ‘Field Quality
Control’ in Part 3 of this specification for Adhesive Test.
2) If Primer required, shall not stain and shall be compatible with substrates.
3) Allow primer to dry before applying sealant.
2. General Interior Sealants:
a. General:
1) Inside jambs and heads of exterior door frames.
2) Both sides of interior door frames.
3) Inside perimeters of windows.
4) Miscellaneous gaps between substrates.
b. Design Criteria:
1) Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, NT, and Class 25 test requirements.
2) 100 percent silicone sealant.
c. Non-Paintable Sealant (Installer Option A):
1) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) Dow Corning: Tub, Tile, And Ceramic Silicone Sealant.
b) Laticrete: Latasil Silicone Sealant.
c) Momentive Performance Materials (formerly, GE Sealants & Adhesives): GE
SCS2800 SilGlaze II Silicone Sealant.
d) Sherwin Williams: White Lightning Silicone Ultra Low Odor Window and Door
Sealant.
e) Tremco: Tremsil 200 Silicone Sealant.
f) Franklin International: Titebond 2601 (White) 2611 (Clear) 100% Silicone Sealant.
d. Paintable Sealant (Installer Option B):
1) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) Momentive Performance Materials (formerly, GE Sealants & Adhesives): GE
SCS7000 Paintable Silicone Sealant.
3. Sealants For Interior Joints:
a. General:
1) Countertops and backsplash to wall.
2) Sinks and lavatories to countertops.
3) Joints between plumbing fixtures and other substrates .
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 5 - 07 9213
b. Interior Ceramic Tile Joints are furnished in Section 07 9213 and installed in Section 09 3013
'Ceramic Tiling' including the following:
1) Ceramic tile inside corners.
2) Ceramic tile and paver tile joints.
c. Description:
1) One-part acetoxy cure silicone sealant with fungicides to resist mold and mildew.
d. Design Criteria:
1) Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, NT, and Class 25 test requirements.
2) 100 percent silicone sealant.
e. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors.
f. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
1) Dow Corning: Tub, Tile, And Ceramic Silicone Sealant.
2) Laticrete: Latasil Tile and Stone Silicone Sealant.
3) Momentive Performance Materials (formerly, GE Sealants & Adhesives): GE SCS1700
Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
4) Tremco: Tremsil 200 Silicone Sealant.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Bond Breaker Tape:
1. Pressure sensitive tape as by Sealant Manufacturer to suit application.
2. Provide tape to prevent adhesion to joint fillers or joint surfaces at back of joint and allow sealant
movement.
B. Joint Backing:
1. Comply with ASTM C1330.
2. Flexible closed cell, non-gassing polyurethane or polyolefin rod or bond breaker tape as
recommended by Sealant Manufacturer for joints being sealed.
3. Oversized 25 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
C. Joint Cleaner:
1. Non-corrosive and non-staining type as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer, compatible with
joint forming materials.
D. Masking Tape:
1. Non-staining, non-absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants and adjacent joint
surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Examine substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive Work.
a. Verify each sealant is compatible for use with joint substrates.
b. Verify joint surfaces are clean and dry.
c. Ensure concrete surfaces are fully cured.
2. Sealants provided shall meet Manufacturer's shelf-life requirements.
3. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing.
a. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
4. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 6 - 07 9213
1. Remove existing joint sealant materials where specified.
a. Clean joint surfaces of residual sealant and other contaminates capable of affecting sealant
bond to joint surface using manufacturer’s recommended joint preparation methods.
b. Repair deteriorated or damaged substrates as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer to
provide suitable substrate. Allow patching materials to cure.
2. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, free of dust, oil, grease, dew, frost or incompatible sealers, paints or
coatings that may interfere with adhesion. Prepare substrates in accordance with Manufacturer’s
instructions:
a. Porous surfaces: Clean by mechanical methods to expose sound surface free of
contamination and laitance followed by blasting with oil -free compressed air.
b. Nonporous surfaces: Use two-cloth solvent wipe in accordance with ASTM C1193. Allow
solvent to evaporate prior to sealant application.
c. High-pressure water cleaning: Exercise care that water does not enter through failed joints.
d. Primers:
1) Primers enhance adhesion ability.
2) Use of primers is not a substitution for poor joint preparation.
3) Primers should be used always in horizontal application where there is ponding water.
3. Field test joints in inconspicuous location.
a. Verify joint preparation and primer required to obtain optimum adhesion of sealants to joint
substrate.
b. When test indicates sealant adhesion failure, modify joint preparation primer, or both and
retest until joint passes sealant adhesion test.
4. Masking: Apply masking tape as required to protect adjacent surfaces and to ensure straight
bead line and facilitate cleaning.
B. Joints:
1. Prepare joints in accordance with ASTM C1193.
a. Clean joint surfaces of contaminates capable of affecting sealant bond to joint surface using
Manufacturer’s recommended instructions for joint preparation methods.
b. Remove dirt, dust, oils, wax, paints, and contamination capable of affecting primer and
sealant bond.
c. Clean concrete joint surfaces to remove curing agents and form release agents.
C. Protection:
1. Protect elements surrounding the Work of this section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Apply silicone sealant in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Do not use damaged or deteriorated materials.
3. Install primer and sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and Manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Apply primer where required for sealant adhesion.
5. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation.
6. Do not use silicone sealant as per the following:
a. Apply caulking/sealant at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
b. Below-grade applications.
c. Brass and copper surfaces.
d. Materials bleeding oils, plasticizers, and solvents.
e. Structural glazing and adhesive.
f. Surfaces to be immersed in water for prolonged time.
B. Joint Backing:
1. Install joint backing to maintain sealant joint ratios recommended by Manufacturer.
2. Install without gaps, twisting, stretching, or puncturing backing material. Use gage to ensure
uniform depth to achieve correct profile, coverage, and performance.
3. Rod for open joints shall be at least 1-1/2 times width of open joint and of thickness to give solid
backing. Backing shall fill up joint so depth of sealant bite is no more than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
deep.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 7 - 07 9213
C. Bond Breaker:
1. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used or where backing is not feasible.
a. Apply bond-breaker tape in shallow joints as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer.
D. Sealant:
1. Apply sealant with hand-caulking gun with nozzle of proper size to fit joints. Use sufficient
pressure to insure full contact to both sides of joint to full depth of joint. Apply sealants in vertical
joints from bottom to top.
2. Fill joint opening to full and proper configuration.
3. Apply in continuous operation.
4. Tool joints immediately after application of sealant if required to achieve full bedding to substrate
or to achieve smooth sealant surface. Tool joints in opposite direction from application direction,
i.e., in vertical joints, from the top down. Do not 'wet tool' sealants.
5. Depth of sealant bite shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) maximum, but
never more than one half or less than one fourth joint width.
E. Caulk gaps between painted or coated substrates and unfinished or pre-finished substrates. Caulk
gaps larger than 3/16 inch (5 mm) between painted or coated substrates.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Provide joint tolerances in accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instru ctions.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Adhesion Test (Installer Option to use adhesion test to determine if primer is required).
1. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C1193, Method
A, Field-Applied Sealant joint Hand-Pull Tab:
a. Perform five (5) tests for first 1,000 linear feet (300 meters) of applied silicone sealant and
one (1) test for each 1,000 linear feet (300 meters) seal thereafter or perform one (1) test per
floor per building elevation minimum.
b. For sealants applied between dissimilar materials, test both sides of joints.
2. Sealants failing adhesion test shall be removed, substrates cleaned, sealants re-installed, and re-
testing performed.
3. Maintain test log and submit report to Architect indicating tests, locations, dates, results, and
remedial actions.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove masking tape and excess sealant.
B. Clean adjacent materials, which have been soiled, immediately (before setting) as recommended by
Manufacturer.
C. Waste Management: Dispose of products in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
END OF SECTION
B L A N K P A G E
Table of Contents - 1 - 08 0000
D I V I S I O N 0 8: O P E N I N G S
08 1000 D O O R S A N D F R A M E S
08 1213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 7000 H A R D W A R E
08 7101 COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
08 7102 HANGING DEVICES
08 7103 SECURING DEVICES
08 7106 CLOSING DEVICES
08 7108 STOPS AND HOLDERS
08 7109 ACCESSORIES
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Hollow Metal Frames - 1 - 08 1213
SECTION 08 1213
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Hollow metal frames.
B. Related Requirements:
1. .
2. Section 06 2024: 'Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation' for installation.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association / Window & Door Manufacturers Association /
CSA Group:
a. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-17, ‘North American Fenestration Standard/Specification
for windows, doors, and skylights'.
2. ASTM International:
a. ASTM A568/A568M-17a, ‘Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and
High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.
b. ASTM A653/A653M-17, ‘Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process'.
3. Steel Door Institute:
a. SDI A250.8-2017, ‘Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames'.
b. SDI A250.11-2012, 'Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames'.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Copy of SDI A250.11.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Suppliers:
1. Category Three Approved Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and
Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements:
a. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT www.cookandboardman.com:
1) Contact Information: Russ Farley: phone (800) 574-4369, fax 801-484-6817, or e-mail
russf@absdoors.com.
b. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT www.beacon-metals.com:
1) Contact Information: Jared Butler: phone (801) 486-4884, cell (435) 216-2297, FAX
801-485-7647, or e-mail Jared@beacon-metals.com.
c. Midwest D-Vision Solutions, Salt Lake City, UT www.mwdsutah.com.
1) Contact Information: Dan Mercer, office (801) 377-4355, cell (801) 618-9456, e-mail
danm@mwdsutah.com.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Hollow Metal Frames - 2 - 08 1213
B. Manufacturers:
1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a. Any current member of Steel Door Institute.
C. Frames:
1. Cold rolled furniture steel:
a. Interior Frames: 16 ga. (1.6 mm).
b. Exterior Frames: 14 ga. (1.9 mm).
2. Provide labeled frame to match fire rating of door.
3. Finish:
a. Use one of following systems:
1) Prime surfaces with rust inhibiting primer.
2) Galvanize.
4. Anchors: 16 US ga (1.6 mm) minimum meeting UL or other code acceptable requirements for
door rating involved.
D. Fabrication:
1. General Requirements:
a. Frames shall be welded units. Provide temporary spreader on each welded frame.
b. Provide Manufacturer's gauge label for each item.
c. Make breaks, arrises, and angles uniform, straight, and true. Accurately fit corners.
2. Frame width dimension:
a. Fabricate frame 1/8 inch (3 mm) wider than finished wall thickness as described in Contract
Documents.
3. Provide mortar guards at strikes and hinges.
4. Anchors:
a. Provide three jamb anchors minimum for each jamb. On hinge side, install one anchor at
each hinge location. On strike side, install one anchor at strike level and anchors at same
level as top and bottom hinges. Tack weld anchors on frames intended for installation in
framed walls.
b. Frames installed before walls are constructed sha ll be provided with extended base anchors
in addition to other specified anchors.
c. Anchor types and configurations shall meet wall conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Flush Wood Doors - 1 - 08 1416
SECTION 08 1416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Flush wood doors.
2. Flush wood doors with openings for grilles as necessary.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 2024: 'Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation' for installation .
2. Section 09 9324: ‘Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood’.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations And Acronyms:
1. AWS: Architectural Woodwork Standards (formerly AWI).
2. FD: Fire-resistant core, fire-resistant materials assembled to stiles and rails according to
methods prescribed by the testing agency to meet rigorous smoke, flame, and pressure tests.
3. FD-5: Core with 2 layers on each side.
4. ME: Matching edges, i.e., vertical edges same as decorative faces.
5. PC: Particleboard core, solid core door with stiles and rails bonded to the core and abrasive
planed flat prior to the application of the faces.
6. PC-5: Core with 2 layers on each side.
B. Association Publications:
1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada,
46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org.
a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 2nd Edition, 2014.
C. Definitions:
1. Adhesive, Type I (fully waterproof): Forms a bond that will retain practically all of its streng th
when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying; bond shall be of such quality that
specimens will withstand shear and the two-cycle boil test specified in ANSI/HPVA HP (latest
edition).
2. Book-Match: Matching between adjacent veneer leaves on one panel face. Every other piece of
veneer is turned over so that the adjacent leaves are “opened” as two pages in a book. The fibers
of the wood, slanting in opposite directions in the adjacent leaves, create a characteristic light and
dark effect when the surface is seen from an angle.
3. Core: The material (typically, veneer, lumber, particleboard, medium-density fiberboard, or a
combination of these) on which an exposed surface material (typically, veneer or HPDL) is
applied.
4. Core, Solid: The innermost layer or section in flush door construction. Typical constructions are
as follows:
a. Core, Mineral: A fire-resistant core material generally used in wood doors requiring fire
ratings of 3/4 hours or more.
b. Particleboard - A solid core of wood or other lignocellulose particles bonded together with a
suitable binder, cured under heat, and pressed into a rigid panel in a flat-platen press.
5. Face Veneer: The outermost exposed wood veneer surface of a veneered wood door, panel, or
other component exposed to view when the project is completed.
6. Fire-rated: Fire-retardant particleboard with an Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) stamp for Class 1
fire rating (Flame Spread 20, Smoke Developed 25). Fire-rated doors are available with
particleboard and mineral cores for ratings up to 1-1/2 hours.
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Flush Wood Doors - 2 - 08 1416
7. Fire-rated Door: A door made of fire-resistant material that can be closed to prevent the spread of
fire and can be rated as resisting fire for 20 minutes (1/3 hour), 30 minutes (1/2 hour), 45 minutes
(3/4 hour) (C), 1 hour (B), or 1-1/2 hours (B). The door must be tested and carry an identifying
label from a qualified testing and inspection agency.
8. Flitch: A hewn or sawn log made ready for veneer production or the actual veneer slices of one
half log, kept in order, and used for the production of fine plywood panels.
9. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or
Premium Grade.
a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural
woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project’s quality of materials,
workmanship, or installation.
b. Premium Grade: The highest Grade available in both material and workmanship where the
highest level of quality, materials, workmanship, and installation is required.
10. Plain Slicing: Most commonly used for hardwood plywood. The log is cut in half, and one half is
placed onto a carriage and moved up and down past a fixed knife to produce the veneers. Veneer
is sliced parallel to the pith of the log and approximately tangent to the growth rings to achieve
flat-cut veneer. Each piece is generally placed in a stack and kept in order. One half log, sliced
this way, is called a “flitch.”
11. Running Match: Each panel face is assembled from as many vene er leaves as necessary. Any
portion left over from one panel may be used to start the next.
12. Stile-and-Rail Construction: A technique often used in the making of doors, wainscoting, and
other decorative features for cabinets and furniture. The basic concept is to capture a panel
within a frame, and in its most basic form it consists of five members: the panel and the four
members that make up the frame. The vertical members of the frame are called stiles, while the
horizontal members are known as rails.
D. Reference Standards:
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association / Window & Door Manufacturers Association /
Canadian Standards Association:
a. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11, ‘North American Fenestration Standard/Specification
for windows, doors, and skylights'.
2. ASTM International:
a. ASTM C1036-16, ‘Standard Specification for Flat Glass'.
b. ASTM C1048-18, ‘Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass—Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass'.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Schedule showing type of door at each location. Included shall be size, veneer, core type,
fire rating, hardware prep, openings, blocking, etc.
b. Indicate factory finish color and type.
2. Samples:
a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish:
1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample
available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished
hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324.
2) Design Criteria:
a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match
Owner provided stain color selected for Project.
b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish
provided.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Test And Evaluation Reports:
a. Submit copies of fire tests showing accessories and configurations necessary for rated
double doors to achieve ratings.
2. Source Quality Control Submittals:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Flush Wood Doors - 3 - 08 1416
a. Samples:
1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish:
a) Owner will provide Control Sample from project for finish.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following information in Operations And Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01
7800:
a. Record Documentation:
1) Manufacturers Documentation:
a) Manufacturer's product literature on doors and factory finish.
b) Maintenance and repair instructions.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Deliver in clean truck and, in wet weather, under cover.
2. Deliver to building site only after plaster, cement, and taping compound are completed and dry
and after interior painting operations have been completed.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Store doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity range between 25 and 55
percent.
2. Store flat on level surface in dry, well ventilated space.
3. Cover to keep clean but allow air circulation.
4. Do not subject doors to direct sunlight, abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity.
5. Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces.
6. Doors have been acclimated to the field conditions for a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours
before installation is commenced.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Manufacturer's standard full door warranty for lifetime of original installation.
a. Warranty shall include finishing, hanging, and installin g hardware if manufacturing defect
was discovered after door was finished and installed.
b. Warranty to include defects in materials including following:
1) Delaminating in any degree.
2) Warp or twist of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more in door panel at time of one (1) year warranty
inspection.
3) Telegraphing of core assembly: Variation of 1/100 inch (0.25 mm) or more in 3 inch (75
mm) span.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Suppliers:
1. Category One Approved Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and
Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements:
a. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT www.cookandboardman.com:
1) Contact Information: Russ Farley: phone (800) 574-4369, fax 801-484-6817, or e-mail
russf@absdoors.com.
b. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT www.beacon-metals.com:
1) Contact Information: Jared Butler: phone (801) 486-4884, cell (435) 216-2297, FAX
801-485-7647, or e-mail Jared@beacon-metals.com.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Flush Wood Doors - 4 - 08 1416
1) mail Jared@beacon-metals.com.
c. Midwest D-Vision Solutions, Salt Lake City, UT www.mwdsutah.com.
1) Contact Information: Dan Mercer, office (801) 377-4355, cell (801) 618-9456, e-mail
danm@mwdsutah.com.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories.
a. Graham Wood Doors, Mason City, IA.
b. Marshfield Door Systems Inc, Marshfield, WI.
c. VT Industries, Holstein, IA.
C. Wood Doors:
1. For Transparent Finish:
a. Type: AWS PC-5ME or FD-5ME.
b. Grade: AWS Premium, except face veneer.
c. Fully Type I Construction: Adhere all glue lines with Type I adhesive, including veneer lay -
up.
d. Face Veneer:
1) Plain sliced Red Oak meeting requirements of AWS Grade A, 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick
minimum immediately before finishing.
2) Face veneers shall be running book matched.
2. For Opaque Finish:
a. Type: AWS PC-5.
b. Grade: AWS Economy.
c. Face Veneer: Paint grade Birch.
d. Adhere all glue lines with Type II adhesive minimum, including veneer lay-up.
3. Core:
a. Fully bonded to stiles and rails and sanded as a unit before applying veneers.
b. Non-Rated And Fire-rated, AWS FD 1/3:
1) 32 lb density meeting requirements of ANSI A208.1 Mat Formed Wood Particle Board,
Grade 1-L-1 minimum.
2) Stiles:
a) 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) deep minimum before fitting.
b) Stile face to be hardwood matching face veneer material, thickness manufacturer's
standard.
3) Rails:
a) 1-1/8 inches (28 mm).
b) Manufacturer's option.
D. Finishes:
1. Factory Finishing:
a. Performance / Design Criteria:
1) Finish factory-finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324.
b. Match existing Project Color Scheme:
a) Control Sample will be existing wood item from Project.
c. Finish: AWS Finish System TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane Premium Grade for unfilled,
open-grain woods.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections:
1. Verification of Performance:
a. Doors shall have following information permanently affixed on top of door:
1) Manufacturer:
2) Door designation or model.
3) Veneer species.
4) Factory finish.
2. Clear Finished Hardwood:
a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Flush Wood Doors - 5 - 08 1416
PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Finish Hardware Requirements - 1 - 08 7101
SECTION 08 7101
COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. General requirements for finish hardware related to architectural wood and hollow metal doors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 2024: ‘Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation’ for installation of hardware.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA), 355 Lexington Avenue, 15th Floor, New
York, NY 10017-6603, Tel: 212-297-2122 Fax: 212-370-9047, www.buildershardware.com.
B. Reference Standards:
1. International Code Council / American National Standards Institute:
a. ICC / ANSI A117.1-2009, ‘Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities'.
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a. UL 10C, ‘Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies' (Third Edition).
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Hardware Templates:
a. Provide hardware templates to Sections 08 1213, 08 1313, and 08 1429 within fourteen (14)
days after Architect approves hardware schedule.
b. Supply necessary hardware installation templates to Section 06 2024 before pre -installation
conference.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's cut sheets.
b. Two (2) copies of Manufacturer’s installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions for
each piece of hardware. Include one (1) set in ‘Operations And Maintenance Manual’ and
send one (1) set with hardware when delivered.
c. Copy of hardware schedule.
d. Written copy of keying system explanation.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit hardware schedule indicating hardware to be supplied.
b. Schedule shall indicate details such as proper type of strikeplates, spindle lengths, hand,
backset, and bevel of locks, hand and degree opening of closer, length of kickplates, length
of rods and flushbolts, type of door stop, and other necessary information necessary to
determine exact hardware requirements.
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Finish Hardware Requirements - 2 - 08 7101
a. Operations and Maintenance Data:
1) Manufacturer’s installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions for each piece of
hardware.
b. Record Documentation:
1) Manufacturers documentation:
a) Manufacturer's literature and/or cut sheets.
b) Include keying plan and bitting schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Neatly and securely package hardware items by hardware group and identify for individual door
with specified group number and set number used on Supplier's hardware schedule.
2. Include fasteners and accessories necessary for installation and operation of finish hardware in
same package.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLIERS
A. Existing Projects (Doors and Door Hardware):
1. USA Projects:
a. Category Three Approved Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
1) Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT www.cookandboardman.com:
a) Contact Information: Russ Farley: phone (800) 574-4369, fax 801-484-6817, or e-
mail russf@absdoors.com.
2) Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT www.beacon-metals.com:
a) Contact Information: Jared Butler: phone (801) 486-4884, cell (435) 216-2297,
FAX 801-485-7647, or e-mail Jared@beacon-metals.com.
3) Midwest D-Vision Solutions, Salt Lake City, UT www.mwdsutah.com.
a) Contact Information: Dan Mercer, office (801) 377-4355, cell (801) 618-9456, e-
mail danm@mwdsutah.com.
2.2 FINISHES
A. Hardware Finishes:
1. Finishes for brass or bronze hardware items shall be:
a. ANSI / BHMA Finish Code 626.
1) Description: Satin Chromium Plated.
2) Base Metal: Brass. Bronze.
2. Finishes for flat goods items may be:
a. ANSI / BHMA Finish Code 630.
1) Description: Satin Stainless Steel.
2) Base Metal: Stainless Steel (300 Series).
3. Materials other than steel, brass, or bronze shall be finished to match appearance satin chromium
plated, except flat goods which shall be satin stainless steel.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners shall be of suitable types, sizes and quantities to properly secure hardware. Fasteners shall
be of same material and finish as hardware unless otherwise specified. Fasteners exposed to weather
shall be non-ferrous or corrosion resisting steel.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Finish Hardware Requirements - 3 - 08 7101
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before ordering materials, examine Contract Documents to be assured that material to be ordered is
appropriate for thickness and substrate to which it is to be secured and will function as intended.
END OF SECTION
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Hanging Devices - 1 - 08 7102
SECTION 08 7102
HANGING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Hinges for flush wood and hollow metal doors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 7101: 'Common Hardware Requirements'.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Hager Companies, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com.
b. Ives, New Haven, CT www.iveshardware.com.
c. McKinney, Scranton, PA www.mckinneyhinge.com.
d. PBB, Ontario, CA www.pbbinc.com.
e. Stanley (dormakaba Americas), Indianapolis IN
www.stanleyhardwarefordoors.com/products/.
B. Hinges:
1. Doors:
a. Sizes:
1) Non-Fire-Rated Doors:
a) 1-3/4 inch 44.5 mm non-fire-rated wood doors in wood frames: 4 inches by 4
inches (100 mm by 100 mm).
b) 1-3/8 inch 35 mm wood or metal doors: 3-1/2 inches by 3-1/2 inches (89 mm by
89 mm).
2. Use non-removable pins on exterior opening doors.
3. Hinges on exterior doors shall be solid brass, plated to achieve specified finish.
4. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a. Interior:
1) Hager: BB 1279.
2) Ives: 5BBI.
3) McKinney: TA 2714.
4) MacPro / McKinney: MPB79.
5) PBB: BB81.
6) Stanley: FBB 179.
b. Exterior:
1) Hager: BB 1191.
2) Ives: 5BBI.
3) McKinney: TA 2314.
4) PBB: BB21.
5) Stanley: FBB 191.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Hanging Devices - 2 - 08 7102
PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Securing Devices - 1 - 08 7103
SECTION 08 7103
SECURING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Items for architectural wood or hollow metal doors:
a. Locksets and latchsets.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. Grade 2 Standard Duty Key-In Lever Cylindrical Lockset:
a. Performance Features:
1) Exceeds 400,000 ANSI cycles.
2) Single motion egress provides easy emergency exit.
3) Full 1 inch (25 mm) throwbolt with saw resistant hardened steel roller pin.
4) Anti-drill design deadbolt. Two (2) ball bearings inserted to prevent drill attacks.
5) ADA-compliant thumbturn.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Standard Key Delivery:
a. Include change keys with hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer List:
a. Best Locks by Stanley, Indianapolis IN www.stanleysecuritysolutions.com.
b. Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com.
c. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com.
d. Ives, New Haven, CT www.iveshardware.com.
e. Knape & Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI www.knapeandvogt.com.
f. Marks USA, Amityville, NY www.marksusa.com.
g. Precision Hardware, Romulus, MI www.precisionhardware.com.
h. Rockwood, Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com.
i. Sargent, New Haven, CT www.sargentlock.com.
j. Schlage, Colorado Springs, CO www.schlage.com.
k. Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN www.vonduprin.com.
l. Yale Commercial Locks, Lenoir City, TN www.yalecommercial.com.
B. General:
1. Backsets shall be 2-3/4 inches (70 mm).
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Securing Devices - 2 - 08 7103
2. Furnish lead shields where required.
C. Locksets And Latchsets:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Grade 2 Standard Duty Key-In Lever Cylindrical Lockset:
1) ANSI/BHMA A156.02 Series 4000 Grade 2.
2) Meet UL 3 hour fire rating.
3) Meet ADA Compliant ANSI A117.1 Accessibility Code.
4) Door Lever:
a) Meet California code for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less return to door.
2. Lever Operated:
a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
1) Grade 2 Standard Duty Key-In Lever Cylindrical Locksets:
a) 7K Series Best Lock with 15D Lever by Stanley standard cylinders - (I/C cores may
be used when authorized by AEC).
b) 175 Series with American Lever by Marks USA.
c) 7 Line Series with L Lever by Sargent.
d) AL Series with Saturn (SAT) Lever by Schlage.
e) 5300LN Series with Augusta (AU) Lever by Yale.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSE-OUT ACTIVITIES
A. Owner’s Instructions:
1. Before Final Acceptance Meeting, send master keys to local FM
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Closing Devices - 1 - 08 7106
SECTION 08 7106
CLOSING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Closers for flush wood doors
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 7101: ‘Common Finish Hardware Requirements’.
2. Section 08 7108: ‘Stops And Holders’.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Warranty Documentation:
1) Manufacturer’s final executed copy of warranty.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty, five (5) years minimum.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a. 8900 Series by Dorma Architectural Hardware, Reamstown, PA www.dorma.com/usa.
b. 1461 Series by LCN Closers, Princeton, IL www.lcnclosers.com.
c. 8501 Series by Norton Door Controls, Charlotte, NC www.nortondoorcontrols.com.
d. 1431 Series by Sargent, New Haven, CT www.sargentlock.com.
e. D-3550/D-3551 Series by Stanley (dormakaba Americas), Indianapolis IN
www.stanleyhardwarefordoors.com/products/.
B. Surface-Mounted Overhead Door Closers:
1. Closers provided under this Section shall be from same Manufacturer.
2. Provide parallel arms on closers unless door position in relation to adjacent wall requires
otherwise. Provide covers.
3. Door Closers on doors that swing 90 degree as shown on Contract Documents:
a. Closers shall allow for 100 degree opening with engaging stop function.
b. Closers shall have following features:
1) Adjustable sweep speed.
2) Adjustable backcheck.
3) Non-handed, non-sized.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Closing Devices - 2 - 08 7106
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount closers on stop side of door wherever conditions permit.
B. Through-bolt hardware-to-door connections.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust closers to provide maximum opening force as required by governing code authority and proper
backcheck and sweep speed.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Stops And Holders - 1 - 08 7108
SECTION 08 7108
STOPS AND HOLDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Door stops.
2. Door stops and holders.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com.
b. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com.
c. Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com.
d. Rockwood Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com.
e. Sargent, New Haven, CT (800) 906-6606 or (203) 562-2151 www.sargentlock.com.
B. Stops:
1. Use wall type stops unless indicated otherwise on Door Schedule.
2. Provide model appropriate for substrate. Wall stops may be either cast or wrought.
3. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Interior Wall Exterior Wall Floor Mount Overhead.
b. Hager 236W 255W 243F - - -
c. Ives WS407CCV WS447 FS438 - - -
d. Rockwood 409 474 / 475 440 / 441 - - -
e. Glynn Johnson - - - - - - - - - GJ 90S
f. Sargent - - - - - - - - - 590S Series
g. Equal as approved by Architect before Installation. See Section 01 6200.
C. Door Stops And Holders:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Hager: 268F, 268S or 256S, 256W.
b. Ives: WS444, WS449, FS446, FS450.
c. Rockwood: 472, 473, 476, 477.
d. Equal as approved by Architect before Installation. See Section 01 6200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work: When using overhead stops, coordinate installation with door closer and
other door hardware.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Stops And Holders - 2 - 08 7108
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Accessories - 1 - 08 7109
SECTION 08 7109
ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Acoustical seals.
2. Door bottoms/door sweeps.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 3013: ‘Ceramic Tiling’ for stone thresholds.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
a. AMP 500-06, ‘Metal Finishes Manual’ for Architectural and Metal Products.
B. Reference Standards:
1. American National Standards Institute / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association:
a. ANSI / BHMA A156.18-2012, ‘Materials and Finishes’.
b. ANSI / BHMA A156.21-2014, ‘American National Standard for Thresholds’.
2. International Code Council / American National Standards Institute:
a. ICC / ANSI A117.1-2009, ‘Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities'.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com.
B. Acoustical Seals:
1. Color as selected by Architect.
2. Type One Acceptable Products:
a. Door Bottom Shoe for Wood Door:
1) 13VDkB by NGP.
2) 211DV by Pemko.
b. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical seals in manner to give continuous air-tight fit.
1. Install smoke gaskets as per Manufacturer’s installation requirements:
2. Install acoustical seal with seal under door.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Accessories - 2 - 08 7109
END OF SECTION
Table of Contents - 1 - Document 09 0000
D I V I S I O N 09: F I N I S H E S
09 2000 P L A S T E R A N D G Y P S U M B O A R D
09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD
09 3000 T I L I N G
09 3013 CERAMIC TILING
09 9000 P A I N T S A N D C O A T I N G S
09 9001 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS
09 9122 INTERIOR PAINTED CMU
09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER
09 9125 INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD
09 9324 INTERIOR CLEAR-FINISHED HARDWOOD
09 9413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Gypsum Board - 1 - 09 2900
SECTION 09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install gypsum board as described in Contract Documents, except behind ceramic
tile.
2. Furnish and install acoustical sealants as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 3013: 'Ceramic Tile' for installation of backerboard joint reinforcing.
2. Section 09 9413: 'Interior Textured Finishing'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. Accessories: Metal or plastic beads, trim, or moulding used to protect or conceal corners, edges,
or abutments of the gypsum board construction.
2. Drywall Primer: Paint material specifically formulated to fill the pores and equalize the suction
difference between gypsum board surface paper and the compound used on finished joints,
angles, fastener heads, and accessories and over skim coatings.
3. Skim Coat: Either a thin coat of joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured
especially for this purpose and applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,
over the entire surface.
4. Texturing: Regular or irregular patterns typically produced by applying a mixture of joint
compound and water, or proprietary texture materials including latex base texture paint, to a
gypsum board surface previously coated with drywall primer.
B. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM C11-18, ‘Standard Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials
and Systems'.
b. ASTM C475/C475M-17, ‘Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for
Finishing Gypsum Board'.
c. ASTM C840-18a, 'Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board'.
d. ASTM C1002-18, 'Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel
Studs'.
e. ASTM C1047-14a, ‘Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and
Gypsum Veneer Base'.
f. ASTM C1178/C1178M-18, ‘Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant
Gypsum Backing Panel'.
g. ASTM C1396/C1396M-17, ‘Standard Specification for Gypsum Board'.
h. ASTM E84-18b, ‘Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials'.
i. ASTM E119-18b, ‘Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials'.
2. Gypsum Association:
a. GA-214-15, ‘Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish'.
b. GA-216-16: ‘Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products'.
c. GA-600-15, ‘Fire Reference Design Manual'.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Gypsum Board - 2 - 09 2900
d. GA-801-2017, ‘Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products: A Guide for Distributors,
Retailers, and Contractors'.
3. International Building Code (IBC) (2018 or latest approved version):
a. Chapter 25, ‘Gypsum Board And Plaster’.
4. Standards Council of Canada / Underwriters Laboratories of Canada:
a. CAN/ULC-S102:2018: ‘Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials and Assemblies'.
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
a. UL 263: ‘Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials' (14th Edition).
b. UL 723: ‘Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; (11th Edition).
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Schedule MANDATORY pre-installation conference immediately before installation of gypsum
wallboard.
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following:
a. Finish requirements necessary for installation of finish materials over gypsum wallboard, and
location and installation of ceramic tile backerboard.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Test And Evaluation Reports:
a. Fire test results or assembly diagrams and numbers confirming products used will provide
required fire ratings with installation configurations used.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General:
1. Following recommendations of GA-801 Guide for Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel
Products unless local, state or federal laws or agency rules differing from the recommendations
shall take precedence.
B. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name, applicable
standard designation, and Manufacturer's name.
C. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Store material under roof and keep dry and protected against damage from weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum board flat to
prevent sagging.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Comply with ASTM C840 or GA-216 requirements, whichever are more stringent:
a. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
1) Temperature shall be 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C) maximum day and
night during entire joint operation and until execution of Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
2) Provide ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture.
3) Avoid hot air drafts that will cause too rapid drying.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Gypsum Board - 3 - 09 2900
b. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. American Gypsum, Dallas, TX www.americangypsum.com.
b. CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc; Tampa, FL www.certainteed.com.
c. Georgia Pacific, Atlanta, GA www.gp.com.
d. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com.
e. Pabco Gypsum, Newark, CA www.pabcogypsum.com.
f. United States Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com.
B. Materials:
1. Interior Gypsum Board:
a. General:
1) Size:
a) Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2) Class Two Quality Standard:
a) Core: Fire-resistant rated gypsum core.
b) Complies with Type X requirements of ASTM C1396/C1396M (Section 5).
c) Surface paper: Face paper suitable for painting.
d) Long edges: Tapered edge.
e) Overall thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer:
a. Product meeting requirements of ASTM C1178/C1178M.
b. Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
c. Square edges.
d. Category Four Approved Manufacturer. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
1) DensShield Fireguard Type X by Georgia Pacific.
2) GlasRoc Tilebacker Type X by CertainTeed.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, OH www.kineticsnoise.com.
b. Magnum Products, Lenaxa, KS www.levelcoat.com.
c. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com.
d. Soundproofing Co, San Marcos, CA www.soundproofing.org.
e. United States Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com.
f. Westpac Materials Inc, Orange, CA www.westpacmaterials.com.
g. Wm. Zinsser & Co, Somerset, NJ www.zinsser.com.
2. Gypsum Board Mounting Accessories:
a. Furring Channels:
1) Class Two Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200 for definitions:
a) Walls: Galvanized DWFC-25.
b) Ceilings: Galvanized DWFC-20.
2) Accessories as required by Manufacturer's fire tests to provide necessary fire ratings.
b. Corner And Edge Trim:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Gypsum Board - 4 - 09 2900
1) Metal, paper-faced metal, paper-faced plastic, or solid vinyl meeting requirements of
ASTM C1047. Surfaces to receive bedding cement treated for maximum bonding.
c. Control Joint:
1) Bent zinc sheet with V-shaped slot, perforated flanges, covered with plastic tape
meeting requirements of ASTM C1047.
3. Joint Compound:
a. Best grade or type recommended by Board Manufacturer and meeting requirements of
ASTM C475/C475M.
1) Use Taping Compound for first coat to embed tape and accessories.
2) Use Taping Compound or All-Purpose Compound for subsequent coats except final
coat.
3) Use Finishing Compound for final coat and for skim coat.
4. Joint Reinforcing:
a. Paper reinforcing tape acceptable to Gypsum Board Manufacturer.
5. Fasteners:
a. Bugle head screws meeting requirements of ASTM C1002:
1) Gypsum Board:
a) Type W: For fastening gypsum board to wood members, of length to penetrate
wood framing 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) minimum.
b) Type S: For fastening gypsum board to steel framing and ceiling suspension
members, of length to penetrate steel framing 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum.
2) Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer:
a) Wood Framing: 11 ga (0.1233 in) (3.1318 mm), galvanized with 7/16 inch (11 mm)
head, hot dipped. Screws: Type W or Type S Hi-Lo, bugle head, rust resistant.
b) Metal Framing:
(1) Light-gauge metal framing: Type S Hi-Lo, bugle or wafer head, self-tapping,
rust resistant. Hi-Lo screws.
(2) Heavy-gauge metal framing: Type S-12 Hi-Lo, bugle or wafer head, rust
resistant.
B. Primer / Surfacer On Surfaces To Receive Texturing:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Sheetrock First Coat by USG.
b. Prep Coat by Westpac Materials.
c. Level Coat by Magnum Products.
d. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Examine substrate and verify framing is suitable for installation of gypsum board.
2. Examine gypsum board before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
3. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing.
a. Do not install board over unsuitable conditions.
4. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Coordinate with Division 06 for location of backblocking for edges and ends of gypsum board and
for blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties.
2. Do not install gypsum board until required blocking is in place.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Gypsum Board - 5 - 09 2900
B. General: Install and finish as recommended in ASTM C840 or GA-216 unless specified otherwise in
this Section.
C. Interior Gypsum Board:
1. General:
a. Install so trim and reinforcing tape are fully backed by gypsum board. No hollow spaces
between pieces of gypsum board over 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide before taping are acceptable.
b. Rout out backside of gypsum board to accommodate items that extend beyond face of
framing, but do not penetrate face of gypsum board, such as metal door frame mounting
brackets, etc.
c. On walls over 108 inches (2 700 mm) high, apply board perpendicular to support
d. Butt edges in moderate contact. Do not force in place. Shim to level.
e. Leave facings true with joint, finishing flush. Vertical work shall be plumb and ceiling
surfaces level.
f. Scribe work closely:
1) Keep joints as far from openings as possible.
2) If joints occur near an opening, apply board so vertical joints are centered over
openings.
3) No vertical joints shall occur within 8 inches (200 mm) of external corners or openings.
g. Install board tight against support with joints even and true. Tighten loose screws.
h. Caulk perimeter joints in sound insulated rooms with specified acoustical sealant.
2. Ceilings:
a. Apply ceilings first using minimum of two (2) men.
b. Use board of length to give minimum number of joints.
c. Apply board perpendicular to support.
3. Fastening:
a. Apply from center of board towards ends and edges.
b. Apply screws 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum from ends and edges, one inch (25 mm) maximum
from edges, and 1/2 inch (13 mm) maximum from ends.
c. Spacing:
1) Ends: Screws not over 7 inches (175 mm) on center at edges where blocking or
framing occurs.
2) Wood Framed Walls And Ceilings: Screws 7 inches (175 mm) on center in panel field.
3) Metal Framed Walls: Screws 12 inches (300 mm) on center in panel field.
d. Set screw heads 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) below plane of board, but do not break face paper. If
face is accidentally broken, apply additional screw 2 inches (50 mm) away.
e. Screws on adjacent ends or edges shall be opposite each other.
f. Drive screws with shank perpendicular to face of board
4. Trim:
a. Edge Trim: Apply where gypsum board abuts dissimilar material. Hold channel an d 'L' trim
back from exterior window and door frames 1/8 inch (3 mm) to allow for caulking.
5. Finishing:
a. General:
1) Tape and finish joints and corners throughout building as specified below to correspond
with final finish material to be applied to gypsum board. When sanding, do not raise
nap of gypsum board face paper or paper-faced trim.
2) First Coat:
a) Apply tape over center of joint in complete, uniform bed of specified taping
compound and wipe with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound. If
metal corner bead is used, apply reinforcing tape over flange of metal corner bead
and trim so half of tape width is on flange and half is on gypsum board.
b) Completely fill gouges, dents, and fastener dimples.
c) Allow to dry and sand lightly if necessary, to eliminate high spots or excessive
compound.
3) Second Coat:
a) Apply coat of specified joint compound over embedded tape extending 3-1/2
inches (88 mm) on both sides of joint center. Use finishing compound only if
applied coat is intended as final coat.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Gypsum Board - 6 - 09 2900
b) Re-coat gouges, dents, and fastener dimples.
c) Allow to dry and sand lightly to eliminate high spots or excessive compound.
4) Third Coat: Apply same as second coat except extend application 6 inches (150 mm)
on both sides of joint center. Allow to dry and sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with
damp sponge.
5) Fourth Coat: Apply same as second coat except extend application 9 inches (425 mm)
on both sides of joint center. Allow to dry and sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with
damp sponge.
a. Finishing Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840, GA-
214 and GA-216:
1) Gypsum Board Surfaces not painted or finished:
a) GA-214 Level 1: ‘All joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint
compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and
ridges are acceptable'.
2) Gypsum Board Surfaces to Receive: Painted Texturing - Section 09 9413: 'Interior
Textured Finishing':
a) GA-214 Level 4: 'All and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint
compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and
one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads
and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All
joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat prepared
surface with specified primer'.
D. Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer:
1. Apply glass mat gypsum tile backer to framing. Attach using specified fasteners spaced 6 inches
(150 mm) on center on edges and into all framing members. Drive screws flush with surface of
board.
2. Shim board to be plumb and flat or level and flat, depending on location.
3. Apply reinforcing only at joints where abutting different materials.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-Conforming Work:
1. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
a. Indications that panels are wet, or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
b. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove from site debris resulting from work of this Section including taping compound spills.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 1 - 09 3013
SECTION 09 3013
CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install ceramic tile and tile setting materials and accessories as described in Contract
Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 2900: 'Gypsum Board' for installation of backerboard behind ceramic tile, except for
joint reinforcing.
2. Section 22 1319: 'Facility Sanitary Sewer Specialties' for floor drains and shower pans installed
in ceramic tile floors.
C. Products Installed But not Furnished Under This Section:
1. Interior Ceramic Tile Joint Sealants:
D. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 9213: 'Elastomeric Joint Sealants'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. American National Standard Specification (ANSI) for the Installation of Ceramic Tile.
2. International Standards Organization (ISO) 13007, ‘Classification for Adhesives and Grout '.
3. Tile Council of North America:
a. TCNA Handbook, 'Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation, 2015'.
B. Definitions:
1. Crack Isolation: Prevention of transfer of cracks from substrate through tile or stone when
substrate is subjected to horizontal movement of cracks.
2. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF): Measures ratio of forces necessary to keep two surfaces
sliding.
3. Epoxy Grout: Mortar system employing epoxy resin and epoxy hardener portions.
4. Grout: Rich or strong cementitious or chemically setting mix used for filling tile joints.
5. ISO 13007 Standards Product Classifications:
a. Adhesives:
Types Classes Special Characteristics
C = Cementitious 1 = Normal F = Fast-Setting
(Thin-Set Mortars) 2 = Improved T = Slip-Resistant
E = Extended Open Time
S1 = Deformable
S2 = Highly Deformable
P1 = Plywood Adhesion
P2 = Improved Plywood Adhesion
D = Dispersion 1 = Normal F = Fast-Setting
(Mastics) 2 = Improved T = Slip-Resistant
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 2 - 09 3013
E = Extended Open Time
R = Reaction Resin 1 = Normal T = Slip-Resistant
(Epoxies) 2 = Improved
1) Cementitious Adhesive (C): Mixture of hydraulic binding agents (e.g. portland cement),
aggregates, and organic additives (e.g. latex polymers, moisture retention additive,
etc…) to be mixed with water or latex admix before mixing.
2) Dispersion Adhesive (D): Ready-to-use mixture of organic binding agents in the form of
an aqueous polymer dispersion, organic additives and mineral fillers - mastic type
products.
3) Reaction Resin Adhesive (R): Single or multi-component mixture of synthetic resin,
mineral fillers and organic additives in which curing occurs by chemical reaction –
epoxy or urethane based products.
4) Class 1 (1): Adhesive has passed minimum pass level tests that are mandatory for that
adhesive type.
5) Class 2 (2): Adhesive has passed same tests as Class 1 and/or other applicable tests,
but at higher pass levels.
6) Fast-Setting (F): Adhesive with accelerated cure time that must achieve minimum
strength requirements of fast setting adhesive. This designation does not apply to
reaction resin adhesives (R).
7) Slip-Resistance (T): Downward movement of a tile applied to combed adhesive layer
on vertical surface must be ≤ 0.5mm for a C or D adhesive, and ≤ 5mm for a type R
adhesive.
8) Extended Open Time (E): Maximum time interval after application at which tiles can be
embedded in applied adhesive and meet tensile adhesion strength requirement must be
≥ 30 minutes. This designation does not apply to reaction resin adhesives (R).
9) Deformability (S): Capacity of hardened adhesive to be deformed by stresses between
tile and substrate without damage to installed surface – to pass S1 requirements an
adhesive must be able to deform ≥ 2.5mm but < 5mm; to pass S2 requirements an
adhesive must be able to deform ≥ 5mm. This designation does not apply to reaction
resin adhesives (R).
10) Exterior Glue Plywood (P): Adhesive with ability to bond tile or stone to exterior glue
plywood substrates (interior only). This designation does not apply to reaction resin
adhesives (R) or dispersion adhesives (D).
b. Grouts:
Types Classes Special Characteristics
CG = Cementitious Grout 1 = Normal F = Fast-Setting
2 = Improved A = High Abrasion Resistance
W = Reduced Water Absorption
RG = Reaction Resin Grouts 1 = Normal Higher performance characteris-
tics than improved cementitious
grouts 2 = Improved
1) Cementitious Grout (CG): Mixture of hydraulic binding agents (e.g. portland cement),
aggregates, inorganic and organic additives (e.g. latex polymers, moisture retention
additive, etc…).
2) Reaction Resin Grout (RG): Single or multi-component mixture of synthetic resin,
mineral fillers and organic additives in which curing occurs by chemical reaction –
epoxy or urethane based products.
3) Class 1 (1): Grout has passed minimum pass level tests that are mandatory for
cementitious grouts.
4) Class 2 (2): Cementitious grout has passed same tests as Class 1 and/or other
applicable tests, but at higher pass levels.
5) Fast-Setting (F): Grout with accelerated cure time that must achieve minimum
compressive strength requirements under normal conditions within twenty four (24)
hours. This designation applies only to cementitious grouts (CG).
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 3 - 09 3013
6) High Abrasion Resistance (A): Capability of grout to resist wear. This designation
applies only to cementitious grouts (CG).
7) Reduced Water Absorption (W): Grout has lower water absorption rate than standard
cementitious grout. This designation applies only to cementitious grouts (CG).
6. Latex/Polymer Modified Portland Cement Mortar: Latex/Polymer modified portland cement
mortar is a mixture of portland cement, sand, and special latex/polymer additive that is used as a
bond coat for setting tile.
7. Pavers: Unglazed porcelain or natural clay tile formed by dust-pressed method and similar to
ceramic mosaics in composition and physical properties but relatively thicker with 6 inch - or more
of facial area. (ASTM C242).
8. Sanded Cement Grout: Factory prepared mixture of cement, graded sand, and other ingredients
to produce water-resistant, dense, uniformly colored material. Used for joints of 1/8 inch (3 mm)
width or greater.
9. Static Coefficient of Friction (SCOF): Measures ratio of forces necessary to start two surfaces
sliding (older measurement of friction replaced by dynamic coefficient of friction (DCOF)).
10. Unsanded Cement Grout: Factory prepared mixture of cement and additives that provide water
retentivity. Used for joints of 1/8 inch (3 mm) or less.
C. Reference Standard:
1. American National Standards Institute:
a. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1, 'American National Standards Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile', Version 2013.1 (compilation of standards):
1) Installation Standards:
a) A108.01, ‘General Requirements: Subsurfaces and Preparation by Other Trades'.
b) A108.02, ‘General Requirements: Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship'.
c) A108.05, ‘Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar of
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar'.
d) A108.6, ‘Installation of Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting
and Grouting Epoxy’.
e) A108.10, ‘Installation of Grout in Tilework'.
f) A108.17, ‘Installation of Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and
Dimension Stone'.
2) Material Specifications:
a) A118.1, ‘Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar'.
b) A118.3. 'Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy
and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive'.
c) A118.4, ‘Latex Portland Cement Mortar'.
d) A118.6, 'Cement Grouts for Tile Installation'.
e) A118.7, ‘High-Performance Polymer Modified Latex/Portland Cement Grouts for
Tile Installation’.
f) A118.10, ‘Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic
Tile and Dimension Stone Installations'.
g) A118.12, ‘Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-set Ceramic Tile and Dimension
Stone Installations'.
b. ANSI A137.1, 'National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile'.
2. ASTM International:
a. ASTM A1064/A1064M-17, 'Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete'.
b. ASTM C144-11, ‘Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar'.
c. ASTM C150/C150M-17, ‘Standard Specification for Portland Cement'.
d. ASTM C206-14, ‘Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime'.
e. ASTM C207-06(2011), ‘Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes'.
f. ASTM C242-15, ‘Standard Terminology of Ceramic Whitewares and Related Products’.
g. ASTM C373-16, 'Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent
Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products'.
h. ASTM C482--02(2014), 'Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland
Cement Paste'.
i. ASTM C501-84(2015), 'Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed
Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser'.
j. ASTM C648-04(2014), 'Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile'.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 4 - 09 3013
k. ASTM C847-14a, ‘Standard Specification for Metal Lath'.
3. International Organization for Standardizat ion:
a. ISO 13007-1-2013, ' Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives - Part 1: Terms, definitions and
specifications for adhesives'.
b. ISO 13007-2-2013, ' Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives - Part 2: Test methods for
adhesives'.
c. ISO 13007-3-2013, ' Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives - Part 3: Terms, definitions and
specifications for grouts'.
d. ISO 13007-4-2013, ' Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives - Part 4: Test methods for grouts'.
4. Tile Council of North America:
a. TCNA W211-15, ‘Masonry or Concrete, Bonded Mortar Bed, Ceramic Tile’.
b. TCNA W221-15, ‘Solid Backing, Mortar Bed, Ceramic Tile’.
c. TCNA W244c-15, ‘Wood or Metal Studs, Cement Backer Board, Ceramic Tile’.
d. TCNA W245-15, ‘Wood or Metal Studs, Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backer
Board, Ceramic Tile’.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following:
a. Review installation scheduling, coordination with related work, and placement of tile.
b. Review Manufacturer’s installation requirements, submittals, and Installers requirements to
assure issuance of Manufacturer’s system warranty.
c. Review surface preparation.
d. Review water-proofing and crack isolation membrane requirements.
e. Review tile base installation requirements.
f. Review floor tile grout thickness requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Samples:
a. 24 inch (600 mm) square sample on specified tile backer showing all types of tile, grout, and
colors specified in this Section. 1/2 of sample board shall show floor tile and 1/2 shall show
wall tile.
b. One sample of each type of base tile and trim piece to be used on Project.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Certificates:
a. Master grade certificate.
1) Conform to ANSI A137.1.
2. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
a. Provide instructions for installation of tile-setting materials.
3. Source Quality Control Submittals:
a. Provide Manufacturer documentation indicating proposed materials will satisfy requirements
for Manufacturer's Warranty.
4. Qualification Statement. See Section 01 4301 for qualifications:
a. Installer:
1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Operations and Maintenance Data:
1) Cleaning and maintenance instructions.
b. Warranty Documentation:
1) Include copy of final, executed warranty.
c. Record Documentation:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 5 - 09 3013
1) Manufacturers Documentation:
a) Source Quality Control Submittal documentation showing materials will satisfy
requirements for Manufacturer's Warranty.
b) Manufacturer's cut sheets of materials used in installed system.
c) Tile color and pattern selections.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Of Materials:
1. Provide materials obtained from one (1) source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting
materials for Manufacture's system warranty.
B. Qualifications:
1. Installer: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following:
a. Minimum three (3) years’ experience installing specified tile installations.
b. Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations of comparable quality, scope, similar
size, and complexity in past two (2) years before bidding.
c. Upon request, submit documentation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Deliver and store packaged materials in their original unopened containers with labels intact until
time of use.
B. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Store and handle materials in a manner to prevent damage or contamination by water, freezing,
or foreign matter.
2. Keep grade seals intact and cartons dry until tile are used.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Do not apply tile setting materials to surfaces that contain frost.
2. Keep ambient temperatures of area to receive tile work and surface temperatures of substrates at
50 deg F (10 deg C) minimum during preparation of mortar bed, laying of tile, and for seventy-two
(72) hours after completion of tile work. Use electric heat to prevent discoloration of grout.
3. Temperature of substrate shall be 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) and rising for application of epoxy and
furan unless otherwise specifically authorized by Manufacturer.
4. Maintain epoxy at stable temperature between 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C)
during curing period.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Mortar Manufacturer’s twenty-five (25) year minimum system warranty on tile-setting materials for
surface preparation, setting materials and grouting materials; includes replacement of defective
materials and deterioration, including replacement of tile and labor and materials when products
purchased are used within their shelf life and installed in accordance to Manufacturers written
instructions and industry standard guidelines.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 6 - 09 3013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer's Contact List:
a. Ardex Engineered Cements, Aliquippa, PA www.ArdexAmericas.com.
1) Contact Information: Don Richards (206) 979-0401
www.Don.richards@ArdexAmericas.com.
b. Custom Building Products, Seal Beach, CA www.custombuildingproducts.com.
1) Contact Information: John Gallup (206) 718-6024 johng@cbpmail.net.
c. Dal-Tile Corp., Div. of Mohawk Industries, Dallas, TX www.daltile.com.
d. Interceramic Inc., Garland, TX www.interceramic.com.
e. Laticrete International Inc., Bethany, CT www.laticrete.com.
f. Mapei Americas Headquarters, Deerfield Beach, FL www.mapei.com.
1) Contact Information: Bart A. Wilde (801) 467-2060 www.bwilde@mapei.com.
g. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc., Anaheim, CA www.merkrete.com.
1) Contact Information: Andy Townes (505) 873-1181 andy.townes@parexusa.com.
h. Schulter Systems L.P., Plattsburgh, NY www.schluter.com.
B. Category Two National Contract Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
1. Contact following suppliers to procure components of tile assembly:
a. Daltile And Stone, Salt Lake City, UT:
1) LDS Project Coordinators:
a) Russ Green and Larry McCleary, (801) 487-9901, cell (801) 301 1461, fax (801)
487-0345 larry.mccleary@daltile.com - www.daltileproducts.com or
www.daltilegreenworks.com.
b. Interceramic:
1) LDS Project Coordinators:
a) First Contact: Diego Chavez, phone (214) 503-5433, fax (877) 551-1979
dichavez@interceramic.com.
b) Second Contact: Jose Valdez, phone (214) 503-5507, fax (877) 551-1979
jvaldez@interceramic.com.
C. Design Criteria:
1. General:
a. Paver Tile: Standard grade porcelain tile, solid color throughout, graded in accordance with
ANSI A137.1:
1) Cove Base with external and internal corner pieces shall be standard grade.
b. Ceramic Tile:
1) Tile shall be standard quality, white or off-white body, square or cushion edge, graded
in accordance with ANSI A137.1.
2) Square edge, white body, lug type wall tile. Field wall tile shall have two lugs on each
edge to assure uniform joint, approximately 0.040 inch (one mm).
3) External and internal corner pieces shall be standard grade.
2. Capabilities:
a. Paver Tile:
1) Water Absorption when tested in accordance with ASTM C373: 0.1 to 0.5 percent.
2) Abrasive Wear Resistance when tested in accordance with ASTM C501: 275 minimum.
3) Breaking Strength when tested in accordance with ASTM C648: 300 lbs minimum.
4) Bond Strength when tested in accordance with ASTM C482: 200 psi minimum.
5) Coefficient of Friction: 0.42 minimum as measured by DCOF (Dynamic Coefficient of
Friction) AcuTest method and requirements as per ANSI A137.1.
D. Description:
1. Paver Tile:
a. Tile Sizes:
1) Finished floor with no slope shown on Contract Documents: 12 inches (300 mm)
square minimum:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 7 - 09 3013
a) Cove Base: External and internal corner pieces to match with bull-nosed top:
(1) 6 inches by 8 inches (150 mm by 200 mm) with bull-nosed top by
Interceramic.
b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of
Categories:
(1) Interceramic.
2) Finished floor with slope shown on Contract Documents: 8 inches (200 mm) square:
a) Cove Base: External and internal corner pieces to match with bull-nosed top:
(1) 6 inches by 8 inches (150 mm by 200 mm) with bull-nosed top.
b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of
Categories:
(1) Daltile.
b. Category Four Approved Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
1) CD05 Bianco Alpi by Daltile.
2) Dotti Ivory by Interceramic.
2. Ceramic Tile:
a. Wall And Ceiling Tile:
1) Walls: 4-1/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches (108 mm by 108 mm).
a) Room Walls:
(1) 0100 White by Daltile.
(2) Bone by Interceramic.
E. Materials:
1. Paver Tile:
a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories:
1) Porcealto Graniti by Daltile.
2) Intertech Unglazed by Interceramic.
2. Wall Tile:
a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories:
1) Semi-Gloss or Matte by Dal-Tile.
2) IC Brites or Mattes or Bold Tones Series by Interceramics.
3. Mortar Bed:
a. Portland Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M, Type 1, designation shall
appear on bag.
b. Hydrated Lime:
1) Meet Requirements of one of following:
a) ASTM C206.
b) ASTM C207, Type S (designation shall appear on bag).
c. Sand: Clean, washed, well-graded, meeting requirements of ASTM C144 with gradation of
100 percent passing No. 8 sieve with not over five (5) percent passing No. 100 sieve.
d. Latex Additive; in lieu of all water:
1) Design Criteria:
a) Meet material specification requirements of ANSI A118.4 or ANSI 118.11.
b) Meet ANSI installation specification requirements of ANSI A108.5.
c) Expansion joints complies with TCA method EJ171.
2) Type Two Acceptable Products:
a) ARDEX: Ardex E 90 Mortar Admix.
b) CUSTOM: Thin-Set Mortar Admix.
c) LATICRETE: 4237 Latex Additive with 211 Powder.
d) MAPEI: Planicrete AC.
e) MERKRETE: 150 Latex Admixture.
4. Metal Trim:
a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
1) Tile / Carpet Junction: Schluter-RENO-AETK.
2) Over Expansion Joints In Slabs: Schluter DILEX-BWS, color G, PG, or HB as selected
by Architect.
5. Joint Sealants:
a. Interior Ceramic Tile Joints are furnished in Section 07 9213 and installed in Section 09 3013
'Ceramic Tiling' including the following:
1) Ceramic and paver cove base inside corners.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 8 - 09 3013
2) Ceramic and paver tile joints.
6. Backer Board Joint Reinforcing: 2 inch (50 mm) wide glass fiber mesh tape.
7. Tile Setting Products:
a. Use only products of same Manufacturer to validate warranty, unless otherwise acceptable
to Ceramic Tile Supplier.
b. Use only products that meet Mortar Manufacturer’s twenty five (25) year system warranty
requirements.
c. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar For Floors:
1) Design Criteria:
a) Meet ANSI material specification requirements of ANSI 118.4, ANSI 118.11, or
ANSI A118.15.
b) Meet ANSI installation specification requirements of ANSI A108.4 or ISO material
specification ISO13007 installation material specification and . C2ES1P2
performance requirements for adhesive.
2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 62 00 for definitions of Categories:
a) ARDEX: Ardex X77.
b) CUSTOM: Megalite Crack Prevention Mortar or FlexBond Premium Crack
Prevention Thin-set Mortar (no additives needed).
c) LATICRETE: 254 Platinum Thinset.
d) MAPEI: Ultraflex 3.
e) MERKRETE: 735 Premium Flex.
d. Latex/Polymer Modified Portland Cement Mortar For Walls:
1) Design Criteria:
a) Meet ANSI material specification requirements of ANSI 118.4, ANSI 118.11, or
ANSI A118.15.
b) Meet ANSI installation specification requirements of ANSI A108.4 or ISO material
specification ISO13007 installation material specification and C2ES1P2
performance requirements for adhesive.
2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) ARDEX: Ardex X77.
b) CUSTOM: Megalite Thin-Set Mortar or FlexBond Fortified Thin-Set Mortar.
c) LATICRETE: 254 Platinum Thinset.
d) MAPEI: Ultraflex 3.
e) MERKRETE: 735 Premium Flex.
e. Floor Grout (Epoxy):
1) Design Criteria:
a) Meet ANSI material specification requirements of ANSI 118.3.
b) Meet ANSI installation specification requirements of ANSI A108.6 and ISO
material specification ISO13007 RG.
2) Approved Color:
a) ARDEX: 25 Stormy Mist.
b) CUSTOM: No. 145 Light Smoke.
c) LATICRETE: No. 24 Natural Grey.
d) MAPEI: No. 11 Sahara Beige.
e) MERKRETE: Pro Epoxy D-153 Buckskin.
3) Category Four Approved Products. See Sect ion 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) ARDEX: Ardex WA.
b) CUSTOM: CEG-Lite 100% Solids Commercial Epoxy Grout.
c) LATICRETE: SpectraLOCK PRO.
d) MAPEI: Kerapoxy (sanded).
e) MERKRETE: Pro Epoxy.
f. Wall Grout (Modified Polymer):
1) Design Criteria:
a) Meet ANSI material specification requirements of ANSI A118.6 or ANSI A118.7.
b) Meet ANSI installation specification requirements of ANSI 108.10 or ISO material
specification ISO13007 C2ES1P2.
2) Color:
a) ARDEX: No. 01 Polar White.
b) CUSTOM: No. 381 Bright White.
c) LATICRETE: No. 44 Bright White.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 9 - 09 3013
d) MAPEI: No. 00 White.
e) MERKRETE: D-11 Snow White.
3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) ARDEX: Ardex FH.
b) CUSTOM: PolyBlend Non-Sanded Grout or Prism Color Consistent Grout.
c) LATICRETE: 1600 Series Unsanded Dry Set Wall Grout with 1776 Grout Admix
Plus additive.
d) MAPEI: Keracolor-U Unsanded Polymer-Modified Grout.
e) MERKRETE: Non-Sanded ColorGrout, latex modified.
g. Waterproofing Membrane:
1) Design Criteria:
a) Meet ANSI installation specification requirements of ANSI 108.10.
b) ANSI installation specification requirements not required.
2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions for Categories:
a) Troweled applied, cement based:
(1) ARDEX: Ardex 8+9.
(2) MAPEI: Mapelastic 315.
b) Liquid applied, latex based:
(1) CUSTOM: RedGard Waterproofing or Crack Prevention Membrane or
FractureFree Crack Prevention Membrane.
(2) LATICRETE: Hydro Ban.
(3) MAPEI: Mapelastic AquaDefense.
(4) MERKRETE: Hydro-Guard SP-1.
h. Crack Isolation Membrane:
1) Design Criteria:
a) Meet ANSI installation specification requirements of ANSI 118.12.
b) ANSI installation specification requirements not required.
2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions for Categories:
a) Flexible, thin, load-bearing, fabric-reinforced:
(1) ARDEX: Ardex 8+9 with SK Mesh Tape.
(2) CUSTOM: Crack Buster Pro Crack Prevention Mat Underlayment, with Peel
& Stick Primer.
(3) LATICRETE: Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane.
(4) MAPEI: Mapeguard 2, and Primer SM.
(5) MERKRETE: Hydro-Guard SP-1.
b) Liquid applied, latex based:
(1) CUSTOM: RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane or
FractureFree Crack Prevention Membrane.
(2) LATICRETE: Hydro Ban.
(3) MAPEI: Mapelastic AquaDefense.
(4) MERKRETE: Fracture Guard 5000.
i. Stone Thresholds:
1) Texture and color variation shall be within limits established by Architect's approved
sample.
2) Free of defects that would materially impair strength, durability, and appearance.
3) Finish: 80 grit exterior hone.
4) White marble, one (1) piece, 7/8 inch (22 mm) thick by 2 1/2 inches (64 mm) by door
opening width. Cross-section to meet handicap accessibility requirements.
F. Mixes:
1. Mortar Beds:
Portland Cement Dry Sand Damp Sand Hydrated Lime*
Floor Mix One Part 5 Parts 4 Part 1/10 Part
Wall Mix One Part - - 5-1/2 to 7 Parts 1/2 Part
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 10 - 09 3013
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. Acceptable Installers:
1. Meet Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Examine substrates where tile will be installed for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions effecting performance of installed tile.
2. Verify tile substrate is well cured, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films, and curing
compounds.
3. Notify Architect in writing if surfaces are not acceptable to install tile:
a. Do not lay tile over unsuitable surface.
b. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces and approval of existing
conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Allow concrete to cure for twenty-eight (28) days minimum before application of mortar bed.
2. Repair and clean substrate in accordance with installation standards and manufacturer’s
instructions.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, door frames, electrical, mechanical, and other work in or
behind tile shall be installed before tile work is started.
B. Special Techniques:
1. Install in accordance with following latest TCNA installation methods:
a. Flush Concrete Slabs with crack isolation membrane: TCNA F115.
b. Mortar Bed on Concrete Slab: TCNA F111 with reinforcing.
c. Framed Walls: TCNA W245 with waterproof membrane.
d. Tile Cove Base: TCNA Flush style.
C. Tolerances:
1. Plane of Vertical Surfaces:
a. 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.450 meters) from required plane shall be plumb and true with
square corners.
2. Variation In Slab Grade:
a. Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) in any 10 feet (3.050 m) of floor slab and distance between
high point and low point of slab of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
b. Slab Testing Procedure:
1) Place ends of straightedge on 3/8 inch (10 mm) high shims.
2) Floor is satisfactory if 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter steel rod rolled under straightedge will
not touch anywhere along 10 foot (3.050 m) length and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) diameter
steel rod will not fit under straightedge anywhere along 10 foot (3.050 m) length.
D. General:
1. Install tile in pattern indicated:
a. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 11 - 09 3013
b. Adjust to minimize tile cutting and to avoid tile less than half size.
c. Center and balance areas of tile if possible.
2. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without
interruption:
3. Maintain heights of tilework in full courses to nearest obtainable dimension where heights are
given in feet and inches (meters and millimeters) and are not required to fill vertical spaces
exactly.
4. Install cut tile with cuts on outer edges of field:
a. Provide straight cuts that align with adjacent materials.
b. When possible, smooth cut edges of tile or use appropriate cutter or wet saw to produce
smooth cuts.
c. Do not install tile with jagged or flaked edges.
5. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of pattern or joint
alignment:
a. Fit tile closely where edges are to be covered by trim, escutcheons, or similar devices.
6. Provide straight tile joints of uniform width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size:
a. Make joints smooth and even, without voids, cracks, or excess mortar or grout.
7. Use a beating block and hammer or rubber mallet so faces and edges of individual tiles are flush
and level with faces and edges of adjacent tiles, and to reduce lippage.
8. Accessories in tilework shall be evenly spaced, properly centered with tile joints, and level, plumb,
and true to correct projection.
9. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise
defective tile work.
E. Application On Concrete Floor:
1. On Mortar Bed:
a. Apply mortar bed to depth equal to depression in slab minus 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
b. Properly cure before installing tile.
2. Clean substrate surface thoroughly.
a. Dampen if very dry, but do not saturate.
3. Install tile with 100 percent contact with mortar bed.
a. Obtaining 100 percent contact may require troweling mortar layer on back of each tile before
placing on mortar bed.
4. Install base by flush method (square or thin-lip method is not acceptable):
a. Allow for expansion joint directly above any expansion or control joints in slab.
5. Insert temporary filler in expansion joints.
F. Application On Walls:
1. On Mortar Bed Over CMU:
a. Apply mortar bed to required thickness of 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum to 3/4 inch (19 mm).
b. Properly cure before installing tile.
2. On Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer Over Framing:
a. Embed fiberglass reinforcing tape at joints with mortar used to adhere tile.
3. Dampen dry backings as determined by environmental conditions and Manufacturer's
recommendations to achieve cure.
4. Allow for sealant joints full height at room corners in wall tile. Insert temporary filler in expansion
joints.
5. Install wall tile directly atop bull-nosed paver tile base.
G. Application Of Mortar:
1. Do not spread more mortar than can be covered within ten (10) to fifteen (15) minutes:
a. If 'skinning' occurs, remove mortar and spread fresh material.
b. Spread mortar with notches running in one (1) direction, perpendicular to pressing, pushing
and pulling of tile during placement.
2. Install tile before mortar has started initial cure:
a. For thin set mortar application, use notch trowel that will achieve the recommended
coverage of mortar after tiles have been installed.
3. Place tile in fresh mortar, press, push and pull tile slightly to achieve as near 100 percent
coverage and contact of tile with setting material and substrate as possible:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 12 - 09 3013
a. Average contact area shall be not less than eighty (80) percent except on exterior or shower
installations where contact area shall be ninety-five (95) percent when not less than three (3)
tiles or tile assemblies are removed for inspection. The eighty (80) percent or ninety-five
(95) percent coverage shall be sufficiently distributed to give full support of the tile .
b. Support corners and edges with mortar leaving no hollow corners or edges.
4. Install so there is 1/8 inch (3 mm) of mortar between tile and substrate after proper bedding:
a. Periodically remove sheets or individual tiles to assure proper bond coverage consistent with
industry specifications.
b. If coverage is found to be insufficient, use a larger size notch trowel.
H. Application Of Grout:
1. Firmly set tile before applying grout:
a. This requires forty-eight (48) hours minimum.
2. Before grouting:
a. Remove all paper and glue from face of mounted tile.
b. Remove spacers or ropes before applying grouting:
3. Mixing Grout:
a. Use clean buckets and mixing tools:
1) Use sufficient pressure and flow grout in progressively to avoid air pockets and voids.
b. Machine mixing of grout is preferred to assure uniform blend. To prevent trapping air
bubbles into prepared grout, use slow speed mixer.
c. Slake for fifteen (15) minutes.
d. Water or latex additives used for mixing with dry grout shall be measured accurately.
4. Before grouting entire area, do a test area to assure there will be no permanent staining or
discoloration of tile and to verify that excess grout can be easily removed from tile surface:
a. If necessary, pre-coat exposed surfaces of tile with a grout release recommended by Grout
Manufacturer to facilitate removal of excess grout.
5. Installing Grout:
a. Use caution, when grouting glazed ceramic tiles to prevent scratching or damaging surface
of tile.
b. Dampen dry joints prior to grouting with sand-portland cement grout, standard sanded
cement grout, standard unsanded cement grout, polymer modified sanded tile grout, and
polymer modified unsanded tile grout. Do not leave puddles of water in joints before
grouting.
c. Keep an adequate joint depth open for grouting. Force maximum amount of grout into joints.
d. Apply grout to produce full, smooth grout joints of uniform width, and free of voids and gaps
1) Fill joints of cushion edge tile to depth of cushion.
2) Fill joints of square edge tile flush with surface.
3) Fill joint between wall tile and bull-nosed paver tile base with floor grout.
e. Install floor tile with grout thickness of 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) maximum.
f. Remove excess grout from surface of tile before it loses its plasticity or begins to set.
g. Finished grout shall be uniform in color, smooth, and without voids, pin holes, or low spots.
I. Curing:
1. Keep installation at 65 to 85 deg F (18 to 30 deg C) during first eight (8) hours of cure. Shade
area completely from sun during this period.
J. Application of Joint Sealants:
1. Apply joint sealants after grout has cured:
a. This requires forty-eight (48) hours minimum.
2. Before applying sealant:
a. Remove spacers or ropes before applying joint sealants.
b. Apply backer rod and joint sealants at expansion joints.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-Conforming Work:
1. Correct any work found cracked, chipped, broken, unbounded and otherwise defective or not
complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Ceramic Tiling - 13 - 09 3013
3.6 CLEANING
A. If one has been used, remove grout release and clean tile surfaces so they are free of grout residue
and foreign matter:
1. If a grout haze or residue remains, use a suitable grout haze remover or cleaner.
2. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Close to traffic areas where tile is being set and other tile work being done :
1. Keep closed until tile is firmly set.
2. Before, during, and after grouting, keep area clean, dry, and free from fore ign materials and
airflow that will interfere with setting and curing of grout.
B. Newly tiled floors shall not be walked on nor worked on without using kneeling boards or equivalent
protection of tiled surface.
C. After cleaning, provide protective covering and maintain conditions protecting tile work from damage
and deterioration:
1. Where tiled surfaces will be subject to equipment or wheel traffic or heavy construction traffic,
cover protective covering with 1/4 inch (6 mm) hardboard, plywood, or similar material.
END OF SECTION
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 1 - 09 9001
SECTION 09 9001
COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Common procedures and requirements for field-applied painting and coating.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 9213: 'Elastomeric Joint Sealants' for quality of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
2. Sections under 09 9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
a. Pre-Installation conferences held jointly with Section 09 9001.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. Damage Caused By Others: Damage caused by individuals other than those under direct control
of Painting Applicator (MPI(a), PDCA P1.92).
2. Gloss Levels:
a. Specified paint gloss level shall be defined as sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance
with following terms and values, unless specified otherwise for a specific paint system.
Gloss Level ‘1’ Traditional matte finish -
flat
0 to 5 units at 60 degrees to 10 units maxi-
mum at 85 degrees.
Gloss Level ‘2’ High side sheen flat -
'velvet-like' finish
10 units maximum at 60 degrees and 10 to
35 units at 85 degrees.
Gloss Level ‘3’ Traditional 'eggshell-like
finish
10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35
units at 85 degrees.
Gloss Level ‘4’ 'Satin-like' finish 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and 35 units
minimum at 85 degrees.
Gloss Level ‘5’ Traditional semi-gloss 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees.
Gloss Level ‘6’ Traditional gloss 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees.
Gloss Level “7’ High gloss More than 85 units at 60 degrees.
3. Properly Painted Surface:
a. Surface that is uniform in appearance, color, and sheen and free of foreign material, lumps,
skins, runs, sags, holidays, misses, strike-through, and insufficient coverage. Surface free
of drips, spatters, spills, and overspray caused by Paint Applicator. Compliance will be
determined when viewed without magnification at a distance of 5 feet (1.50 m) minimum
under normal lighting conditions and from normal viewing position (MPI(a), PDCA P1.92).
4. Latent Damage: Damage or conditions beyond control of Painting Applicator caused by
conditions not apparent at time of initial painting or coating work.
B. Reference Standards:
1. The latest edition of the following reference standard shall govern all painting work:
a. MPI(a), 'Architectural Painting Specification Manual' by Master Painters Institute (MPI), as
issued by local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.
b. MPI(r), 'Maintenance Repainting Manual' by Master Painters Institute (MPI), as issued by
local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 2 - 09 9001
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Schedule painting pre-installation conference after delivery of paint or coatings and before or at
same time as application of field samples.
a. Coordinate pre-installation conferences of all related painting and coating Sections under 09
9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
b. Schedule conference before preparation of control samples as specified in Sections under
09 9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
c. Conference to be held at same time as Section 09 2900 to review gypsum board finish
preparation.
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following:
a. Review Quality Assurance for Approval requirements.
b. Review Quality Assurance Field Sample requirements.
c. Review Submittal requirements for compliance for MPI Approved Products.
d. Review Design Criteria requirements.
e. Review Cleaning requirements.
f. Review painting schedule.
g. Review safety issues.
3. Review additional agenda items from Sections under 09 9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Include following information for each painting product, arranged in same order as in Project
Manual.
1) Manufacturer's cut sheet for each product indicating ingredients and percentages by
weight and by volume, environmental restrictions for application, and film thicknesses
and spread rates.
2) Provide one (1) copy of ‘MPI Approved Products List’ showing compliance for each MPI
product specified.
a) MPI Information is available from MPI Approved Products List using the following
link: http://www.paintinfo.com/mpi/approved/index.shtml.
3) Confirmation of colors selected and that each area to be painted or coated has color
selected for it.
2. Samples: Provide two 4 inch by 6 inch (100 mm by 150 mm) minimum draw-down cards for each
paint or coating color selected for this Project.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer Instructions:
a. Manufacturer's substrate preparation instructions and application instruction for each
painting system used on Project.
2. Qualification Statement:
a. Applicator:
1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architec t or Owner.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Record Documentation:
1) Manufacturer’s documentation:
a) Manufacturer's cut sheet for each component of each system.
b) Schedule showing rooms and surfaces where each system was used.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approval:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 3 - 09 9001
1. Conform to work place safety regulations and requirements of those authorities having jurisdiction
for storage, mixing, application and disposal of all paint and related hazardous materials.
2. Paint and painting materials shall be free of lead and mercury, and have VOC levels acceptable
to local jurisdiction.
3. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards:
a. Products: Comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in ‘MPI Approved Products List’.
b. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in ‘MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual’ for products and coatings indicated.
B. Qualifications:
1. Applicator: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following:
a. Minimum five (5) years’ experience in painting installations.
b. Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed projects of comparable quality, similar size, and
complexity in past three (3) years before bidding.
c. Maintain qualified crew of painters throughout duration of the Work.
d. Upon request, submit documentation.
C. Field Samples:
1. Before application of any paint system, meet on Project site with Architect, Owner's
representative, and Manufacturer's representative. Architect may select o ne (1) surface for
application of each paint system specified. This process will include establishing acceptable
substrate conditions required for Project before application of paints and coatings.
2. Apply paint systems to surfaces indicated by Architect following procedures outlined in Contract
Documents and Product Data submission specified above.
3. After approval of samples, proceed with application of paint system throughout Project. Approved
samples will serve as standard of acceptability.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Deliver specified products in sealed, original containers with Manufacturer's original labels intact
on each container.
2. Deliver amount of materials necessary to meet Project requirements in single shipment.
3. Notify Architect two working days before delivery of coatings.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Store materials in single place.
2. Keep storage area clean and rectify any damage to area at completion of work of this Section.
3. Maintain storage area at 55 deg F (13 deg C) minimum.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Perform painting operations at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by
Manufacturer for each operation and for each product for both interior and exterior work.
2. Apply painting systems at lighting level of 540 Lux (50 foot candles) minimum on surfaces to be
painted.
a. Inspection of painting work shall take place under same lighting conditions as app lication.
b. If painting and coating work is applied under temporary lighting, deficiencies discovered
upon installation of permanent lighting will be considered latent damage as defined in MPI
Manual, PDCA P1-92.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 4 - 09 9001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
b. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of ‘Architectural
Painting Specification Manual’ by Master Painters Institute (MPI).
c. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under Approved Product List
section of MPI Painting Manual.
d. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats) as defined in MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual, except as otherwise indicated.
e. Where specified paint system does not have Premium Grade, provide Budget Grade.
f. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in coating system.
B. Materials:
1. Materials used for any painting system shall be from single manufacturer unless approved
otherwise in writing by painting system manufacturers and by Architect. Include manufacturer
approvals in Product Data submittal.
2. Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, and other painting materials shall be pure, be compatible with
other coating materials, bear identifying labels on containers, and be of highest quality of an
approved manufacturer listed in MPI manuals. Tinting color shall be best grade of type
recommended by Manufacturer of paint or stain used on Project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Directing applicator to begin painting and coating work will indicate that substrates to re ceive
painting and coating materials have been previously inspected as part of work of other Sections
and are complete and ready for application of painting and coating systems as specified in those
Sections.
B. Pre-Installation Testing:
1. Before beginning work of this Section, examine, and test surfaces to be painted or coated for
adhesion of painting and coating systems.
2. Report in writing to Architect of conditions that will adversely affect adhesion of painting and
coating work.
3. Do not apply painting and coating systems until party responsible for adverse condition has
corrected adverse condition.
C. Evaluation And Assessment:
1. Report defects in substrates that become apparent after application of primer or first finish coat to
Architect in writing and do not proceed with further work on defective substrate until such defects
are corrected by party responsible for defect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection Of In-Place Conditions:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 5 - 09 9001
1. Protect other finish work and adjacent materials during painting. Do not splatter, drip, or paint
surfaces not intended to be painted. These items will not be spelled out in detail but pay special
attention to the following:
a. Keep cones of ceiling speakers completely free of paint. In all cases where painting of metal
speaker grilles is required, paint without grilles mounted to speakers and without grilles on
ceiling.
b. On existing work where ceiling is to be painted, speakers and grilles are already installed,
and ceiling color is not being changed, mask off metal grilles installed on ceiling speakers. If
ceiling color is being changed, remove metal grilles and paint, and mask off ceiling
speakers.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements and requirements of Manufacturer for
each painting system specified, unless instructed differently in Contract Documents. Bring
conflicts to attention of Architect in writing.
2. Fill minor holes and cracks in wood surfaces to receive paint or stain.
3. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of loose dirt. Clean and dust surfaces before
painting or finishing.
4. Do no exterior painting while surface is damp, unless recommended by Manufacturer, nor during
rainy or frosty weather. Interior surfaces shall be dry before painting. Moisture content of
materials to be painted shall be within tolerances acceptable to Paint Manufacturer.
5. Sand woodwork smooth in direction of grain leaving no sanding marks. Clean surfac es before
proceeding with stain or first coat application.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Coordinate with other trades for materials and systems that require painting before installation.
2. Schedule painting and coating work to begin when work upon which painting and coating work is
dependent has been completed. Schedule installation of pre-finished and non-painted items,
which are to be installed on painted surfaces, after application of final finishes.
B. Paint or finish complete all surfaces to be painted or coated as described in Contract Documents,
including but not limited to following items.
1. Finish casework and wood trims that are specified to be installed under Section 06 2001 and that
are not called out to be factory-or shop-finished. Back prime wood elements to be installed
against concrete or masonry or that may be subjected to moisture.
2. Paint mechanical, electrical, and audio/visual items that require field painting as indicated in
Contract Documents. These include but are not limited to:
3. Paint inside of chases in occupied spaces flat black for 18 inches (450 mm) or beyond sightline,
whichever is greater.
C. Apply sealant in gaps 3/16 inch (5 mm) and smaller between two substrates that are both to be
painted or coated. Sealants in other gaps furnished and installed under Section 07 9213.
D. On wood to receive a transparent finish, putty nail holes in wood after application of stain using natural
colored type to match wood stain color. Bring putty flush with adjoining surfaces.
E. In multiple coat paint work, tint each succeeding coat with slightly lighter color, but approximating
shade of final coat, so it is possible to check application of specified number of coats. Tint final coat to
required color.
F. Spread materials smoothly and evenly. Apply coats to not less than wet and dry film thicknesses and
at spreading rates for specified products as recommended by Manufacturer.
G. Touch up suction spots after application of first finish coat.
H. Paint shall be thoroughly dry and surfaces clean before applying succeeding coats.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 6 - 09 9001
I. Use fine sandpaper between coats as necessary to produce even, smooth surfaces.
J. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean, sharp, and without overlapping.
K. Finished work shall be a 'Properly Painted Surface' as defined in this Section.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-Conforming Work:
1. Correct deficiencies in workmanship as required to leave surfaces in conformance with 'Properly
Painted Surface,' as defined in this Section.
2. Correction of 'Latent Damage' and 'Damage Caused By Others,' as defined in this Section, is not
included in work of this Section.
3.5 CLEANING
A. General:
1. As work proceeds and upon completion of work of any painting Section, remove paint spots from
floors, walls, glass, or other surfaces and leave work clean, orderly, and in acceptable condition.
B. Waste Management:
1. Remove rags and waste used in painting operations from building each night. Take every
precaution to avoid danger of fire.
2. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, caulking,
empty paint cans, cleaning rags, etc.) shall be disposed of subject to regulations of applicable
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Remove debris caused by work of paint Sections from premises and properly dispose.
4. Retain cleaning water and filter out and properly dispose of sediments.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 7 - 09 9001
ATTACHMENTS
PART 4 - PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 9122 'Interior Painted CMU'.
2. Section 09 9123 'Interior Painted Gypsum Board-Plaster'.
3. Section 09 9125 'Interior Wood Paint'.
4. Section 09 9324 'Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood'.
B. Colors:
1. Interior:
a. Class One Color Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200:
1) Interior Clear Finished Wood (See Section 09 9324):
a) Match other interior clear finished wood building elements.
2) Interior Gypsum Board, Plaster (See Section 09 9123):
a) Match other interior gypsum board
C. Colors:
1. Interior:
a. Interior Clear Finished Wood (See Section 09 9324):
1) Match other interior clear finished wood building elements.
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Painted CMU - 1 - 09 9122
SECTION 09 9122
INTERIOR PAINTED CMU
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements':
a. Pre-installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001.
a. 'Attachment: Paint Color Schedule' for O&M / R&I Projects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer:
1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of
Categories:
a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later
are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located.
B. Description:
1. Rest Rooms:
a. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 4.2E Waterborne Epoxy Finish system.
2. All Other:
a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 4.2D Latex Finish system.
b. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) REX 4.2H Latex Finish system.
C. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements.
b. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish require ments.
c. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade finish requirements.
d. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5.
D. Materials:
1. Block Filler, Over New Masonry Only: MPI Product 4: ‘Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior’.
2. Finish Coats: MPI Product 141: ‘Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss
(MPI Gloss Level 5)’.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Painted CMU - 2 - 09 9122
B. Existing Painted Surfaces:
1. Remove deteriorated existing paint by scraping or sanding. Wash su rfaces that have been
defaced with marking pens, crayons, lipstick, etc, with solvent recommended by Paint
Manufacturer. Spot prime such surfaces.
2. Sand areas of existing sound paint if necessary for bonding of new paint system. Clean existing
painted surfaces, sanded or not, with mild soap and water, or with tri-sodium phosphate (TSP).
3. Fill large holes with patching and small holes and cracks with spackle.
4. Apply one coat primer to scraped and sanded areas.
5. Apply one finish coat. Completely cover voids in masonry block but do not fill.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster - 1 - 09 9123
SECTION 09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Preparing, priming, and finish painting new interior gypsum board and plaster surfaces as
described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 2900: ‘Gypsum Board’ for:
a. Priming new interior gypsum board surfaces to receive sheet wall covering system or
texturing.
b. Pre-installation conference.
2. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements':
a. Pre-installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
b. 'Attachment: Paint Color Schedule' for O&M / R&I Projects.
3. Section 09 9413: 'Interior Textured Finishing' for textured finishes.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 09 2900.
a. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 09 2900, review
following:
1) Review finish level requirements of gypsum wallboard as specified in Section 09 2900.
2. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers and Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of
Categories.
a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later
are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located.
B. Description:
1. Rest Rooms:
a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 9.2F Waterborne Epoxy Finish system.
b. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 9.2E Waterborne Epoxy Finish system.
2. All Other:
a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 9.2B Latex Finish system.
b. Previously Finished Work: Use MPI(r) RIN 9.2B Latex Finish system.
C. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster - 2 - 09 9123
b. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements.
c. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade requirements.
d. Gloss / Sheen Required:
1) Rest Rooms And Custodial Rooms: Gloss Level 6.
2) Remaining Painted Surfaces: Gloss Level 5.
D. Materials:
1. Primers:
a. MPI Product 50, 'Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior'.
2. Finish Coats:
a. Rest Rooms:
1) Buildings with only Gypsum Board surfaces in rooms:
a) MPI Product 115, 'Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior, Gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6)’.
2) Buildings with CMU and Gypsum Board surfaces in same rooms:
a) MPI Product 77, 'Epoxy, Gloss'.
b. Remaining Painted Surfaces:
1) MPI Product 141, 'Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss (MPI
Gloss Level 5)’.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001.
B. New Surfaces:
1. Primer: Apply primer to be covered with other paint coats with roller only, or with spray gun and
back-rolled.
C. Existing Painted Surfaces:
1. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping or sanding. Feather
edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces.
2. Clean surface with mild soap and water, or with tri-sodium phosphate (TSP). Wash surfaces that
have been defaced with marking pens, crayons, lipstick, etc, with solvent recommended by Paint
Manufacturer. Spot prime such surfaces.
3. Spackle and tape cracks. Sand to smooth finish and spot prime.
4. Sand or chemically etch existing painted surface as required to prepare surface to accept new
paint.
5. Re-clean surface.
6. Apply primer coat.
7. Apply finish coats.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Painted Wood - 1 - 09 9125
SECTION 09 9125
INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Preparing and painting new woodwork and wood floors not requiring transparent finish, as
described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements':
a. Pre-installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
b. 'Attachment: Paint Color Schedule' for O&M / R&I Projects.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of
Categories:
a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later
are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located.
B. Description:
1. Systems:
a. All Other:
1) New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 6.3T or U Latex Finish system.
2) Previously Finished Surfaces: MPI(r) Rin 6.3U Latex Finish system.
C. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements.
b. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements.
c. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade finish requirements.
d. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5.
D. Materials:
1. Woodwork:
a. Primer Coat: MPI Product 39, ‘Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood’ or MPI Product 45, ‘Primer
Sealer, Alkyd, Interior’.
b. Finish Coats: MPI Product 153, ‘Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss
(MPI Gloss Level 5)’.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Painted Wood - 2 - 09 9125
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001.
B. Interface With Other Work:
1. Properly clean and paint light cove interiors before installation of light fixtures.
2. Where back-priming is required, apply one (1) coat of primer.
C. New Surfaces:
1. Spot prime nail holes, cracks, and blemishes before and after puttying.
2. Apply stain blocker or other product recommended by Paint Manufacturer to knots before
applying primer coat.
D. Existing Painted Surfaces:
1. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping and sanding. Feather
edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces. Spot prime bare wood
areas on woodwork.
2. Wash surfaces that have been defaced with marking pens, crayons, lipstick, etc, with solvent
recommended by Paint Manufacturer. Spot prime such surfaces.
3. Apply finish coats.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood - 1 - 09 9324
SECTION 09 9324
INTERIOR CLEAR-FINISHED HARDWOOD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Preparing and finishing of new interior clear finished hardwood as described in Contract
Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 2210: ‘Miscellaneous Wood Trim’.
2. Section 06 4512: ‘Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim’.
3. Section 08 1429: ‘Interior Flush Wood Doors’.
4. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements':
a. Pre-installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
b. 'Attachment': Paint Color Schedule' for O&M / R&I Projects.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association / American National Standards Institute:
a. ANSI/KCMA A161.1-2000 (R2005) 23-Jan-2001 ‘Recommended Performance and
Construction Standards for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets.’
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001.
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 09 9001, review following:
a. Review control sample(s).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Samples:
a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish:
1) Requirements for samples are specified in Related Requirement Sections listed above.
b. Design Criteria:
1) Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Test And Evaluation Reports:
a. Before beginning finish work, submit Finish Manufacturer's literature or certification that
finish material meets requirements of ANSI / KCMA A161.1.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood - 2 - 09 9324
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Materials:
1. Design Criteria:
a. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001.
2. Stain: MPI 90, 'Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood'.
3. Clear Finish Coats:
a. Field Finished:
1) Chemcraft International Inc:
a) First, Second, And Third Coats: 20 Sheen Opticlear Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer.
2) ICI Dulux / Trinity:
a) First Coat: ICE Vinyl Sanding Sealer.
b) Second And Third Coats: ICI Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer.
3) Lilly / Valspar:
a) First, Second, And Third Coats: 20 Sheen Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer 587E208.
4) Sherwin-Williams:
a) First Coat: T67F3 Vinyl Sealer.
b) Second And Third Coats: T77F38 Sherwood Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer DRE.
b. Mill Finished: Architectural Woodwork finished in a mill may use one (1) coat of Vinyl Sealer
and two (2) coats of Conversion Varnish or three (3) coats of Conversion Varnish from one
(1) of the approved Finish Manufacturers, as recommended by Finish Manufacturer.
c. Products meeting testing requirements for finishes of ANSI / KCMA A161.1 may be used
upon approval of submission by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
4. Color:
a. Design Criteria:
1) Finish to match Owner selected sample.
a) LDS 95:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001.
2. Sand entire exposed surface of item to be finished lightly with 120 to 150 non -stearated
sandpaper and clean before applying dye or stain.
3. Apply stain in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to attain
correct color.
4. Scuff sand with 220 non-stearated sandpaper between application of application stain and first
finish coat.
5. If wood is finished before installation, finish cut ends and other unfi nished, exposed surfaces
same as previously finished surfaces after installation of wood.
B. Where back-priming is required, apply one coat of finish material.
C. Architectural Woodwork Door Surfaces (cabinetry doors only):
1. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges before faces.
2. Finish architectural woodwork doors with no hardware applied to doors.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Textured Finishing - 1 - 09 9413
SECTION 09 9413
INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and apply texturing on walls and ceilings as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 2900: 'Gypsum Board' for priming.
2. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements' for:
a. Pre-installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading ‘Paints and Coatings’.
3. Section 09 9123: 'Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster' for finish painting.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. Drywall Texture: Compound rolled, sprayed, or troweled onto sheetrock after taping and floating
of joints is complete. Uses same material as joint compound, but thinned down with water and
applied to wall surface:
a. Smooth - Smooth application of texture over sheetrock wall that feathers out sheetrock
joints, and creates even, non-textured wall.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001.
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 09 9001, review following:
a. Review control samples.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Samples:
1. Before performing work of this Section, prepare control samples.
2. Architect will inspect control sample at pre-installation conference following preparation of control
sample. When sample is approved, work of this Section may proceed. Approved samples will be
kept at site at all times work of this section is being performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com.
b. U S Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com.
B. Materials:
1. Class Two Quality Standards: See Section 01 6200.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Interior Textured Finishing - 2 - 09 9413
a. ProForm Perfect Spray EM/HF by National Gypsum.
b. Sheetrock Wall & Ceiling Texture by U S Gypsum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Location:
1. Walls:
a. Smooth:
1) Restrooms.
2. Ceilings:
a. Smooth Finish (no applied texture) to be applied to the following ceilings:
1) Font.
B. Finishing:
1. Smooth:
a. No applied texture is required. Apply priming and paint as specified in Section 09 9123 .
END OF SECTION
Table of Contents - 1 - Document 10 0000
D I V I S I O N 10: S P E C I A L T I E S
10 2000 I N T E R I O R S P E C I A L T I E S
10 2813 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Toilet Accessories - 1 - 10 2813
SECTION 10 2813
COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Included But Is Not Limited To:
1. Selected accessories for Rest Rooms
a. Grab Bars.
b. Mirrors.
c. Shelf.
d. Single Robe Hook.
2. Custodial Room accessories:
a. Utility Shelf.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 1100: 'Wood Framing' for blocking.
2. Section 06 2001: 'Common Finish Carpentry Requirements' for installation.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1200: 'Multiple Contract Summary’ soap dispensers, paper towel dispensers, and
toilet tissue dispensers furnished and installed by Owner (FM Group).
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. United States Access Board:
a. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):
1) ADA Standards:
a) ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) (2004 or latest version).
B. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International:
a. A153/A153M-16a, ‘Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware’.
b. ASTM A653/A653M-17, ‘Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process’.
c. ASTM A666-15, 'Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless
Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar'.
d. ASTM C1036-18, ‘Standard Specification for Flat Glass’.
e. ASTM F446-85(2009), ‘Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and
Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area’.
2. International Code Council / American National Standards Institute:
a. ICC/ANSI A117.1-2017, ‘Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities'.
3. International Standard Organization:
a. ISO 25537:2008, ‘Glass in Building - Silvered Flat Glass Mirror.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's product data sheets indicating operating characteristics, materials and
finishes.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Toilet Accessories - 2 - 10 2813
b. Mounting requirements and rough-in dimensions.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Schedule showing items used, location where installed, and proper attaching devices for
substrate.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturers' Instructions:
a. Provide operation, care and cleaning instructions .
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Warranty Documentation:
1) Final, executed copy of Warranty for each product.
b. Record Documentation:
1) Manufacturers documentation:
a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. For products listed together in same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from
single manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Manufacturer's standard warranty.
B. Special Mirror Warranty:
1. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop
visible silver spoilage or frame corrosion defects within specified warranty period:
a. Warranty Period: fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER FUNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Category One Approved Products (Furnished and Installed by Owner):
1. Automatic Touchless Towel Dispensers:
a. Mount Towel Dispenser in ‘Recessed Waste Receptacle Cabinet’.
b. Category One Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
Georgia-Pacific enMotion model no. 59460:
1) Size: 14.8 inches (376 mm) wide x 9.75 inches (248 mm) deep x 16.75 inches (425
mm) high.
2) Power source: battery.
3) Color: splash blue.
2. Soap dispensers.
3. Toilet tissue dispensers.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Toilet Accessories - 3 - 10 2813
a. AJW Architectural Products, A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc., New Windsor, NY
www.ajwashroom.com.
b. American Specialties Inc (ASI), Yonkers, NY www.americanspecialties.com.
c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc, North Hollywood, CA www.bobrick.com or Bobrick
Washroom Equipment of Canada Ltd, Scarborough, ON (416) 298-1611.
d. Bradley Corp, Menomonee Falls, WI www.bradleycorp.com.
e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co (GAMCO), Durant, OK www.gamcousa.com.
B. Materials:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304 (18-8); satin finish exposed surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
c. Fasteners:
1) Exposed: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and
tamper-and-theft resistant.
2) Concealed: Galvanized Steel.
2. Rest Rooms:
a. Mirrors:
1) Channel-Frame Mirror:
a) Frame: Type 304 or Type 430, 20 gauge stainless steel channel frame.
b) Roll-formed one piece construction.
c) Exposed surfaces have #4 satin finish.
d) Edges and corners are burr free.
e) Glass: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) silver coated and hermetically sealed. Guaranteed for
15 years against silver spoilage. Mirrors meet ASTM C1036 requirements.
f) Concealed surface mounted wall hanger.
2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) AJW Architectural Products: Model U711.
b) American Specialties (ASI): Model 0620.
c) Bobrick: Model B-165.
d) Bradley: Model 781.
e) General Accessory (GAMCO): Model C Series.
b. Grab Bars:
1) Configuration shown on Contract Drawings. Include center support for longer lengths
when required:
2) Design Criteria:
a) Comply with ADA guidelines and ADAAG accessible design for structural strength
and local and state codes.
b) Concealed mount.
c) 18 ga (1.27 mm), type 304 stainless steel tubing.
d) 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter.
e) Provide center support when required.
f) Snap-on flange covers.
g) Peened (non-slip) finish.
h) Sustain loads in excess of 900 lbs (408 kg).
3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) AJW Architectural Products: Model UG3 Series.
b) American Specialties (ASI): Model 3800 Series.
c) Bobrick: Model B-6806 Series.
d) Bradley: Model 812 Series.
e) General Accessory (GAMCO): Model 150 Series.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Toilet Accessories - 4 - 10 2813
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and installation heights as shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Assemble fixtures and associated fittings and trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install using mounting devices proper for base structure.
D. Install equipment level, plumb, and firmly in place in accordance with manufacturer's rough -in
drawings.
E. Where possible, mount like items in adjoining compartments back -to-back on same partition.
F. Grab Bars:
1. Install as per Manufacturers written installation instruc tions.
2. Install grab bars to withstand downward force of not less than 250 lbf (1112 N) per ASTM F446.
3.2 REPAIR
A. Repair or replace defective work, including damaged equipment and components.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning equipment, or equipment with parts that bind or are misaligned.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean unit surfaces, and leave in ready-to-use condition.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Test each piece of equipment provided with moving parts to assure proper operation, freedom of
movement, and alignment. Install new batteries in battery-powered items.
3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Turn over keys, tools, maintenance instructions, and maintenance stock to Owner.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Table of Contents - 1 - Document 22 0000
D I V I S I O N 22: P L U M B I N G
22 0500 C O M M O N W O R K R E S U L T S F O R P L U M B I N G
22 0501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT
22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 1000 P L U M B I N G P I P E S A N D P U M P S
22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1313 FACILITY SEWERS
22 1319 FACILITY SANITARY SEWER SPECIALTIES
22 4000 P L U M B I N G F I X T U R E S
22 4213 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
22 4216 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Plumbing Requirements - 1 - 22 0501
SECTION 22 0501
COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Common requirements and procedures for plumbing systems.
2. Furnish and install sealants relating to installation of systems installed under this Division.
3. Furnish and install Firestop Penetration Systems for plumbing systems penetrations as described
in Contract Documents.
B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment for plumbing systems installed under other Sections.
2. Section 07 8400: 'Firestopping' for quality of penetration firestop systems to be used on Project
and submittal requirements.
3. Section 07 9213: 'Elastomeric Joint Sealant' for quality at building exterior.
4. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: 'Paints And Coatings' for painting of plumbing items requiring
field painting.
5. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in
their respective materials.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item.
1) Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include Manufact urer's
catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to show compliance
with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show capacities and size of
equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data
underlined.
2) Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Qualification Statement:
a. Plumbing Subcontractor:
1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner.
b. Installer:
1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Operations and Maintenance Data (Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7800):
1) At beginning of PLUMBING section of Operations And Maintenance Manual, provide
master index showing items included:
a) Provide name, address, and phone number of Architect, Architect's Mechanical
Engineer, General Contractor, and Plumbing subcontractor.
b) Identify maintenance instructions by using same equipment identification used in
Contract Drawings. Maintenance instructions shall include:
(1) List of plumbing equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and
nameplate data of each item together with number and name associated with
each system item.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Plumbing Requirements - 2 - 22 0501
(2) Manufacturer’s maintenance instructions for each piece of plumbing
equipment installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor,
installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of
equipment, and maintenance instructions.
c) Provide operating instructions to include:
(1) General description of fire protection system.
(2) Step by step procedure to follow for shutting down system or putting system
into operation.
b. Warranty Documentation:
1) Include copies of warranties required in individual Sections of Division 22.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of Plumbing Codes applicable to Project.
Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances.
2. In case of differences between building codes, laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations,
and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Notify Architect in writing of such
differences before performing work affected by such differences.
3. Identification:
a. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL / ULC and AGA / CGA labels
shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner.
B. Qualifications. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following:
1. Plumbing Subcontractor:
a. Company specializing in performing work of this section.
1) Minimum five (5) years experience in plumbing installations.
2) Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations in past three (3) years of projects
similar in size, scope, and complexity required for this project before bidding.
b. Upon request, submit documentation.
2. Installer:
a. Licensed for area of Project.
b. Designate one (1) individual as project foremen who shall be on site at all times during
installation and experienced with installation procedures required for this project.
c. Upon request, submit documentation.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place.
2. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01, stored material shall be readily accessible for
inspection by Architect until installed.
2. Store items subject to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment made out in favor of Owner.
B. Special Warranty:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Plumbing Requirements - 3 - 22 0501
1. Guarantee plumbing systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to
construct system in accordance with Contract Documents.
2. If plumbing sub-contractor with offices located more than 150 miles (240 km) from Project site is
used, provide service / warranty work agreement for warranty period with local plumbing sub-
contractor approved by Architect. Include copy of service / warranty agreement in warranty
section of Operation And Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Components shall bear Manufacturer's name and trade name. Equipment and materials of same
general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform appearance, operation, and
maintenance.
B. Pipe And Pipe Fittings:
1. Weld-O-Let and Screw-O-Let fittings are acceptable.
C. Valves:
1. Valves of same type shall be of same manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. Acceptable Installers:
1. Meet Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Drawings:
1. Plumbing Drawings show general arrangement of piping, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as
actual building construction and work of other trades will permit.
2. Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish
information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over
Plumbing Drawings.
3. Because of small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work
and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet
conditions.
B. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Examine premises to understand conditions that may affect performance of work of this Division
before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which plumbing work is
dependent for efficiency and report work that requires correction.
2. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to
ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of
size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. If
approval is received by Addendum or Change Order to use other than originally specified items,
be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space
available.
3. Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and
roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordinate with
Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Plumbing Requirements - 4 - 22 0501
4. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to
failure to examine site conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Demolition Requirements:
1. Remove existing fixtures and piping not to be reused as per drawings.
B. Changes Due To Equipment Selection:
1. Where equipment specified or otherwise approved requires different arrangement or connections
from that shown in Contract Documents, submit drawings showing proposed installations.
2. If proposed changes are approved, install equipment to operate properly and in harmony with
intent of Contract Documents. Make incidental changes in piping, ductwork, supports,
installation, wiring, heaters, panelboards, and as otherwise necessary.
3. Provide additional motors, valves, controllers, fittings, and other equipment required for proper
operation of systems resulting from selection of equipment.
4. Be responsible for proper location of rough-in and connections provided under other Divisions.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to
installer of electrical system.
2. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in sufficient
time to be incorporated into construction as work proceeds. Locate these items and confirm that
they are properly installed.
3. Furnish inserts for attaching hangers that are to be cast in concrete floor construction to Division
03 at time floors are poured.
B. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to previously installed or existing work. Do not cut
beams, columns, or trusses.
C. Locating Equipment:
1. Arrange pipes and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, unions, traps, and to clear
openings of doors and access panels.
2. Adjust locations of pipes, equipment, and fixtures to accommodate work to interferences
anticipated and encountered.
3. Install plumbing work to permit removal of equipment and parts of equipment requiring periodic
replacement or maintenance without damage to or interference with other parts of equipment or
structure.
4. Determine exact route and location of each pipe before fabrication.
a. Right-Of-Way:
1) Lines that pitch shall have right-of-way over those that do not pitch. For example,
plumbing drains shall normally have right-of-way.
2) Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right -of-way over lines whose
elevations can be changed.
b. Offsets, Transitions, and Changes in Direction:
1) Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes as required to maintain
proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on Drawings.
2) Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and devices as required to effect
these offsets, transitions, and changes in direction.
D. Penetration Firestops:
1. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at plumbing systems penetrations
through walls, ceilings, roofs, and top plates of walls.
E. Sealants:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Plumbing Requirements - 5 - 22 0501
1. Seal openings through building exterior caused by penetrations of elements o f plumbing systems.
2. Furnish and install acoustical sealant to seal penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and
ceilings.
F. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely
control entire apparatus:
1. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have
to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division
from responsibility for proper installation of plumbing sy stems.
2. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or block
access to doors, windows, or access openings:
a. Arrange so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles.
b. Provide accessible flanges or ground joint unions, as applicable for type of piping specified,
at connections to equipment and on bypasses.
1) Make connections of dissimilar metals with di-electric unions.
2) Install valves and unions ahead of traps and strainers. Provide unions on both sides of
traps.
c. Do not use reducing bushings, bull head tees, close nipples, or running couplings. Street
elbows are allowed only on potable water pipe 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter and smaller.
d. Install piping systems so they may be easily drained
e. Install piping to insure noiseless circulation.
f. Place valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access. Valves shall be
regulated, packed, and glands adjusted at completion of work before final acceptance.
3. Do not install piping in shear walls.
4. Cut piping accurately to measurements established at site. Remove burr and cutting slag from
pipes.
5. Work piping into place without springing or forcing. Make piping connections to pumps and other
equipment without strain at piping connection. Remove bolts in flanged connections or
disconnect piping to demonstrate that piping has been so connected, if requested.
6. Make changes in direction with proper fittings.
7. Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe:
a. Provide for expansion in every 30 feet (9 meters) of straight run.
b. Provide 12 inch (300 mm) offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof.
8. Expansion of PEX Pipe: Allow for expansion and contraction of PEX pipe as recommended by
Pipe Manufacturer.
G. Escutcheons:
1. Provide spring clamp plates where pipes run through walls, floors, or ceilings and are exposed in
finished locations of building. Plates shall be chrome plated heavy brass of plain pattern and
shall be set tight on pipe and to building surface.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION
A. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work
of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it:
1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance
as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown.
2. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests:
1. Perform tests on plumbing piping systems. Furnish devices required for testing purposes.
B. Non-Conforming Work:
1. Replace material or workmanship proven defective with sound material at no additional cost to
Owner.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Plumbing Requirements - 6 - 22 0501
2. Repeat tests on new material, if requested.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from each length of piping before installation:
1. After each section of piping used for movement of water or steam is installed, flush with clean
water, except where specified otherwise.
2. Arrange temporary flushing connections for each section of piping and arrange for flushing total
piping system.
3. Provide temporary cross connections and water supply for flushing and drainage and remove
after completion of work.
B. Clean exposed piping, equipment, and fixtures. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves.
3.8 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Instruction of Owner:
1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Stake Physical Facilities Representative in operation
and maintenance of plumbing systems utilizing Operation And Maintenance Manual when so
doing.
2. Conduct instruction period after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly
working and before final payment is made.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the
work, and isolating parts of completed system. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to
keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or
similar materials.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing - 1 - 22 0529
SECTION 22 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Common hanger and support requirements and procedures for plumbing systems.
B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:
1. Paint identification for gas piping used in HVAC equipment.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 8400: ‘Firestopping’ for quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project
and submittal requirements.
2. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in
their respective materials.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH www.anvilintl.com.
b. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.b-line.com.
c. Unistrut, Wayne, MI www.tyco-unistrut.com.
B. Materials:
1. Hangers, Rods, And Inserts
a. Galvanized and UL approved for service intended.
b. Support horizontal piping from hangers or on roller assemblies with channel supports, except
where trapeze type hangers are explicitly shown on Drawings. Hangers shall have double
nuts.
1) Support insulated pipes 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter and smaller with adjustable
swivel ring hanger with insulation protection shield. Gauge and length of shield shall be
in accordance with Anvil design data.
a) Type Two Acceptable Products:
(1) Swivel Ring Hanger: Anvil Fig. 69.
(2) Insulation Protection Shield: Anvil Fig. 167.
(3) Equals by Cooper B-Line.
c. Support rods for single pipe shall be in accordance with following table:
Rod Diameter Pipe Size Rod Diameter Pipe Size
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing - 2 - 22 0529
3/8 inch 2 inches and smaller 10 mm 50 mm and smaller
1/2 inch 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches 13 mm 64 mm to 88 mm
5/8 inch 4 to 5 inches 16 mm 100 mm to 125 mm
3/4 inch 6 inches 19 mm 150 mm
7/8 inch 8 to 12 inches 22 mm 200 mm to 300 mm
d. Support rods for multiple pipe supported on steel angle trapeze hangers shall be in
accordance with following table:
Rods Number of Pipes per Hanger for Each Pipe Size
Number Diameter 2 Inch 2.5 Inch 3 Inch 4 Inch 5 Inch 6 Inch 8 Inch
2 3/8 Inch Two 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1/2 Inch Three Three Two 0 0 0 0
2 5/8 Inch Six Four Three Two 0 0 0
2 5/8 Inch Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 0
2 5/8 Inch Twelve Nine Seven Five Three Two Two
Rods Number of Pipes per Hanger for Each Pipe Size
Number Diameter 50mm 64mm 75mm 100mm 125mm 150mm 200mm
2 10 mm Two 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 13 mm Three Three Two 0 0 0 0
2 16 mm Six Four Three Two 0 0 0
2 19 mm Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 0
2 22 mm Twelve Nine Seven Five Three Two Two
1) Size trapeze angles so bending stress is less than 10,000 psi (69 MPa).
e. Riser Clamps For Vertical Piping:
1) Type Two Acceptable Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 261.
b) Equals by Cooper B-Line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Furnish inserts for attaching hangers that are to be cast in concrete floor construction to Division
03 at time floors are poured.
B. Piping:
1. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and
anchorage.
a. Except for underground pipe, suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls
using Unistrut and clamps. Do not hang pipe from other pipe, equipment, or ductwork.
Laying of piping on any building element is not allowed.
b. Supports For Horizontal Piping:
1) Support metal piping at 96 inches (2 400 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1-1/4 inches
(32 mm) or larger and 72 inches (1 800 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1-1/8 inch (29
mm) or less.
2) Support PEX pipe at 32 inches (800 mm) minimum on center.
3) Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required.
c. Supports for Vertical Piping:
1) Place riser clamps at each floor or ceiling level.
2) Securely support clamps by structural members, which in turn are supported directly
from building structure.
3) Provide clamps as necessary to brace pipe to wall.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing - 3 - 22 0529
d. Install supports from inserts cast into concrete floor system, includin g concrete joists and
floor slabs. Where inserts cannot be used, provide expansion shields and support hangers
from angles held in place by expansion bolts, never directly from expansion bolt itself.
Provide calculations necessary to determine number of expansion bolts required to equal
capacity of cast-in-place insert.
e. Attach Unistrut to structural steel roof supporting structure. Spacing and support as
described above.
f. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scotch 33
plastic tape.
2. Gas piping Identification:
a. Apply paint identification for gas piping used with HVAC equipment as specified in Section
23 0553.
END OF SECTION
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Identification For Plumbing Pipes And Equipment - 1 - 22 0553
SECTION 22 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install identification of plumbing piping and equipment as described in Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Materials:
1. Labels:
a. Equipment Identification:
1) Black formica, with white reveal when engraved.
2) Lettering to be 3/16 inch (5 mm) high minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Labels:
1. Identify following items with specified labels fastened to equipment with screws (unless noted
otherwise):
a. Water Heaters.
2. Engrave following data from Equipment Schedules on Drawings onto labels:
a. Equipment mark.
b. Room(s) served.
c. Panel and breaker from which unit is powered.
B. Painting:
1. Only painted legends, directional arrows, and color bands are acceptable.
2. Locate identifying legends, directional arrows, and color bands at following points on exposed
piping of each piping system:
a. Adjacent to each item of equipment.
b. At point of entry and exit where piping goes through wall.
c. On each riser and junction.
d. Every 25 feet (7.6 m) on long continuous lines.
e. Stenciled symbols shall be one inch high and black.
3.2 ATTACHMENTS
A. Schedules:
1. Pipe Identification Schedule:
a. Apply stenciled symbols as follows:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Identification For Plumbing Pipes And Equipment - 2 - 22 0553
Pipe Use Abbreviation Direction of Flow
Domestic Cold Water CW
Domestic Hot Water HW
Domestic Recirc Water HW Recirc
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Plumbing Piping Insulation - 1 - 22 0719
SECTION 22 0719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install insulation on hot and cold water lines, fittings, valves, and accessories as
described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 22 1116: ‘Domestic Water Piping’.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Armacell, Mebane, NC www.armaflex.com.
b. Childers Products Co, Eastlake, OH www.fosterproducts.com.
c. IMCOA, Youngsville, NC www.nomacokflex.com.
d. Johns-Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com.
e. Knauf, Shelbyville, IN www.knauffiberglass.com.
f. Manson, Brossard, PQ, Canada www.isolationmanson.com.
g. Nomaco Inc, Yopungsville, NC www.nomacokflex.com.
h. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH www.owenscorning.com.
i. Speedline Corp, Solon, OH www.speedlinepvc.com.
B. Materials:
1. Above Grade Metal Piping:
a. Insulation For Piping:
1) Snap-on glass fiber or melamine foam pipe insulation, or heavy density pipe insulation
with factory vapor jacket.
2) Insulation Thickness:
Service Water
Temperature
Pipe Sizes
Up to 1-1/4 In 1-1/2 to 2 In Over 2 In
170 - 180 Deg F One In 1-1/2 In 2 In
140 - 160 Deg F 1/2 In One In 1-1/2 In
45 - 130 Deg F 1/2 In 1/2 In One In
Service Water
Temperature
Pipe Sizes
Up to 32 mm 38 to 50 mm Over 50 mm
77 - 82 Deg C 25 mm 38 mm 50 mm
60 - 71 Deg C 13 mm 25 mm 38 mm
7 - 54 Deg C 13 mm 13 mm 25 mm
3) Performance Standards: Fiberglas ASJ by Owens-Corning.
4) Type One Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Childers Products.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Plumbing Piping Insulation - 2 - 22 0719
b) Knauf.
c) Manson.
d) Owens-Corning.
e) Johns-Manville.
f) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.
b. Fitting, Valve, And Accessory Covers:
1) PVC.
2) Performance Standard: Zeston by Johns-Manville.
3) Type One Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Knauf.
b) Speedline.
c) Johns-Manville.
d) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.
2. Below Grade Metal Piping:
a. Insulation:
1) 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2) Category Four Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories:
a) SS Tubolit by Armacell.
b) ImcoLock by Imcoa.
c) Nomalock or Therma-Cel by Nomaco.
b. Joint Sealant:
1) Category Four Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories:
a) Armacell 520.
b) Nomaco K-Flex R-373.
3. Pex Piping, Above And Below Grade:
a. Insulation:
1) 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2) Category Four Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories:
a) SS Tubolit by Armacell.
b) ImcoLock by Imcoa.
c) Nomalock or Therma-Cel by Nomaco.
b. Joint Sealant:
1) Category Four Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories:
a) Armacell 520.
b) Nomaco K-Flex R-373.
c)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Above Grade Piping:
1. Apply insulation to clean, dry piping with joints tightly butted.
2. Install insulation in manner to facilitate removal for repairs. Place sections or blocks so least
possible damage to insulation will result from inspection or repairs of piping or equipment.
3. Piping up to 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) Diameter:
a. Adhere 'factory applied vapor barrier jacket lap' smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps
with white vapor barrier adhesive.
b. Adhere 3 inch (76 mm) wide self-sealing butt joint strips over end joints.
4. Fittings, Valves, And Accessories:
a. Do not apply insulation over flanged joints or victaulic couplings until piping has been
brought up to operating temperature and flange bolts have been fully tightened. Insulate
valves so wheel, stem, and packing nut are exposed.
b. Insulate with same type and thickness of insulation as pipe, with ends of insulation tucked
snugly into throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe insulation tufted and tucked in.
c. Piping Up To 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm) Diameter:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Plumbing Piping Insulation - 3 - 22 0719
1) Cover insulation with one piece fitting cover secured by stapling or taping ends to
adjacent pipe covering.
2) Alternate Method:
a) Insulate fittings, valves, and accessories with one inch of insulating cement and
vapor seal with two 1/8 inch (3 mm) wet coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced
with glass fabric extending 2 inches (50 mm) onto adjacent insulation.
5. Pipe Hangers:
a. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers.
b. Pipe Shield:
1) Provide schedule 40 PVC by 6 inch (150 mm) long at each clevis and/or unistrut type
hanger.
2) Provide 16 ga (1.64 mm) by 6 inch (150 mm) long galvanized shields at each pipe
hanger to protect pipe insulation from crushing by clevis hanger.
3) Provide 22 ga (0.85 mm) by 6 inch (150 mm) long galvanized shield at each pipe
hanger to protect insulation from crushing by Unistrut type hanger.
6. Protect insulation wherever leak from valve stem or other source might drip on insulated surface,
with aluminum cover or shield rolled up at edges and sufficiently large in area and of shape that
dripping will not splash on surrounding insulation.
B. Below Grade Piping:
1. Slip underground pipe insulation onto pipe and seal butt joints.
2. Where slip-on technique is not possible, slit insulation, apply to pipe, and seal seams and joints.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Domestic Water Piping - 1 - 22 1116
SECTION 22 1116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install potable water piping complete with necessary valves, connections, and
accessories inside building as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 22 0501: 'Common Piping Requirements'.
2. Section 22 0719: 'Plumbing Piping Insulation'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Sanitary Engineers:
a. ANSI/ASSE 1003-2009, 'Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves
for Domestic Water Distribution Systems'.
b. ANSI/ASSE 1017-2009, ‘Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing
Valves for Hot Water Distribution Systems'.
c. ANSI/ASSE 1070-2015, ‘Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting
Devices'.
2. American Water Works Association:
a. AWWA C904-16, ‘Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pressure Pipe, 1/2 inch (12 mm)
Through 3 inch (76 mm) for Water Service’.
3. ASTM International:
a. ASTM B88-16, 'Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube'.
b. ASTM E84-18b, ‘Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials’.
c. ASTM F876-17, ‘Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing’.
d. ASTM F877-18a, ‘Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Hot- and Cold-
Water Distribution Systems’.
e. ASTM F1807-18a, ‘Standard Specification for Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp
Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing and SDR9 Polyethylene of Raised
Temperature (PE-RT) Tubing’.
f. ASTM F2023-15, ‘’Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance of
Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing and Systems to Hot Chlorinated Water’.
g. ASTM F2389-17a, ‘Standard Specification for Pressure-rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping
Systems'.
4. NSF International Standard:
a. NSF P171, 'Protocol for Chlorine Resistance of Plastic Piping Materials' (1999).
5. NSF International Standard / American National Standards Institute:
a. NSF/ANSI 14-2018, 'Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials'.
b. NSF/ANSI 61-2017, 'Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects'.
c. NSF/ANSI 372-2016, 'Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content'.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 03 3111.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Domestic Water Piping - 2 - 22 1116
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's Literature:
1) PEX pipe and PEX pipe fittings.
2. Samples:
a. PEX pipe fitting.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Test And Evaluation Reports:
a. Written report of sterilization test.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Meet NSF International Standards for materials or products that come into contact with drinking
water, drinking water treatment chemicals, or both for chemical contaminants and impurities that
are indirectly imparted to drinking water from products, components, and materials used in
drinking water systems.
2. California only: California Assembly Bill 1953 (AB1953) Compliant for Lead Free
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Manufacturer’s Warranty covering property damage caused by defective product including
renovation costs or replacement costs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Aquatherm, Inc., Lindon, UT www.aquathermpipe.com.
b. Acorn Controls, City of Industry, CA www.acorneng.com
c. Cash Acme, Cullman, AL www.cashacme.com
d. Chicago Faucets, Des Plaines, IL, www.chicagofaucets.com.
e. Cla-Val Company, Costa Mesa, CA or Cla-Val Canada Ltd, Beamsville, ON www.cla-
val.com.
f. Conbraco Industries Inc, Matthews, NC www.conbraco.com or Conbraco (Honeywell Ltd),
Scarborough, ON (416) 293-8111.
g. Hammond Valve, New Berlin, WI www.hammondvalve.com.
h. Handy & Harmon Products Div, Fairfield, CT www.handyharmon.com or Handy and Harmon
of Canada Ltd, Rexdale, ON (800) 463-1465 or (416) 675-1860.
i. Harris Products Group, Cincinnati, OH www.harrisproductsgroup.com.
j. Honeywell Inc, Minneapolis, MN www.honeywell.com.
k. Leonard Valve Co, Cranston, RI www.leonardvalve.com.
l. Milwaukee Valve Co, New Berlin, WI www.milwaukeevalve.com.
m. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com.
n. Nupi Americas, Early Branch, SC www.nupiamericas.com.
o. Rehau, Leesburg, VA www.rehau-na.com.
p. Sloan Valve Co, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com.
q. Spence Engineering Co, Walden, NY www.spenceengineering.com.
r. Symmons Industries, Braintree, MA www.symmons.com.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Domestic Water Piping - 3 - 22 1116
s. Uponor Inc, Apple Valley, MN www.uponor-usa.com.
t. Viega ProPress, Wichita, KS www.viega-na.com.
u. Watts Regulator Co, Andover, MA www.wattsreg.com.
v. Wilkins (Zurn Wilkins), Paso Robles, CA www.zurn.com.
w. Zurn PEX, Inc., Commerce, TX www.zurnpex.com.
B. Materials:
1. Design Criteria:
a. All drinking water products, components, and materials above and below grade used in
drinking water systems must meet NSF International Standards for Lead Free.
b. No CPVC allowed.
2. Pipe:
a. Copper:
1) Above-Grade:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM B88, Type L.
2) Below-Grade:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM B88, Type K. 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum under slabs.
b) 2 inches (50 mm) And Smaller: Annealed soft drawn.
c) 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) And Larger: Hard Drawn.
b. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX):
1) Certified with NSF International against NSF Standards NSF/ANSI 14, NSF/ANSI 61,
NSF/ANSI 372, and NSF P171 Protocol.
2) Copper tube size (CTS) outside dimensions and Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of 9.
3) Pressure rated for 160 psi (1.10 MPa) at 73 deg F (22.8 deg C), 100 psi (0.69 MPa) at
180 deg F (82 deg C), and 80 psi (0.552 MPa) at 200 deg F (93 deg C).
4) Marked with Manufacturer's name, design pressure and temperature ratings, and third
party certification stamp for NSF-PW.
5) Manufactured by Engel or peroxide method (PEX-A) or by silane method (PEX-B).
6) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) `Raupex by Rehau.
b) Wirsbo Aquapex by Uponor.
c) ViegaPEX by Viega.
d) Zurn PEX by Zurn PEX.
3. Fittings:
a. For Copper Pipe: Wrought copper.
b. For PEX Pipe:
1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) Everloc by Rehau.
b) Viega PEX Press Zero Lead Fittings with attached stainless steel sleeves or Viega
PEX Press Radel-R Polymer with attached stainless steel sleeves by Viega.
c) ProPEX fittings by Uponor including EP flow-through multiport tees.
d) Zurn PEX XL, DZR and CR fittings.
4. Connections For Copper Pipe:
a. Above-Grade:
1) Sweat copper type with 95/5 or 96/4 Tin-Antimony solder, Bridgit solder, or Silvabrite
100 solder. Use only lead-free solder.
2) Viega ProPress System
b. Below Grade:
1) Brazed using following type rods:
a) Copper to Copper Connections:
(1) AWS Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6 percent silver).
(2) AWS Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15 percent silver).
2) Copper to Brass or Copper to Steel Connections: AWS Classification BAg-5 Silver (45
percent silver).
3) Do not use rods containing Cadmium.
4) Brazing Flux:
a) Approved Products:
(1) Stay-Silv white brazing flux by Harris Product Group.
(2) High quality silver solder flux by Handy & Harmon.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Domestic Water Piping - 4 - 22 1116
5) Joints under slabs acceptable only if allowed by local codes.
5. Ball Valves:
a. Use ball valves exclusively unless otherwise specified. Ball valves shall be by single
manufacturer from approved list below.
b. Valves shall be two-piece, full port for 150 psi (1.03 MPa) SWP.
1) Operate with flow in either direction, suitable for throttling and tight shut-off.
2) Body: Bronze, 150 psig (1.03 MPa) wsp at 350 deg F (177 deg C) and 400 psig (2.76
MPa) wog.
3) Seat: Bubble tight at 100 psig (0.69 MPa) under water.
c. Class One Quality Standard: Nibco T585 or S585.
1) Equal by Conbraco 'Apollo,' Hammond, Milwaukee, or Watts.
6. Mixing Valve For Lavatories:
a. Solid brass construction and CSA B125 certified.
b. Includes integral check valves and inlet screen. Features advanced paraffin-based actuation
technology.
c. Flow of 5.7 GPM (21.58 LPM) with maximum 10 psi (69 kPA) pressure drop. Perform to
minimum flow of 0.5 GPM (1.89 LPM) in accordance with ASSE 1070.
d. Set for 110 deg F (43 deg C) Service.
e. Match Construction Drawings for connection sizes.
f. Class One Quality Standard: Powers LFLM495. See Section 01 6200.
g. Acceptable Manufacturers: Acorn, Chicago Faucets, Leonard, Powers, Sloan, Symmons
and Watts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Below Grade:
1. Install piping under slabs without joints where possible.
2. Insulate water piping buried within building perimeter.
3. Bury water piping 6 inches (150 mm) minimum below bottom of slab and encase in 2 inches (50
mm) minimum of sand.
B. Locate cold water lines a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) from hot water line.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests:
1. Before pipes are covered, test systems in presence of Architect/Engineer at 125 psig (0.86 MPa)
hydrostatic pressure for four (4) hours and show no leaks.
2. Disconnect equipment not suitable for 125 psig (0.86 MPa) pressure from piping system during
test period.
3. PP-R Piping:
a. Test in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions prior to covering.
1) Provide documentation.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Sterilize potable water system with solution containing 200 parts per million minimum of available
chlorine and maintaining pH of 7.5 minimum. Introduce chlorinating materials into system in manner
approved by Architect/Engineer. Allow sterilization solution to remain for twenty -four (24) hours and
open and close valves and faucets several times during that time.
B. After sterilization, flush solution from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is less
than 0.2 parts per million.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Domestic Water Piping - 5 - 22 1116
C. Water system will not be accepted until negative bacteriological test is made on water taken from
system. Repeat dosing as necessary until such negative test is accomplished.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Facility Sanitary Sewers - 1 - 22 1313
SECTION 22 1313
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within building and connect where
applicable.
2. Perform excavation and backfill required by work of this Section.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Sections Under 07 3000 Heading: Furnishing and installing of roof jacks and pipe flashing at
roof.
2. Section 07 8400: ‘Firestopping’ for quality of firestopping material.
3. Section 22 0501: ‘Common Plumbing Requirements’.
4. Section 22 1319: 'Facility Sanitary Sewer Specialties' for furnishing of sewer specialties.
5. Section 31 2316: 'Excavation' for criteria for performance of excavation.
6. Section 31 2323: 'Fill' for criteria for performance of backfill and compaction.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. American National Standards Institute / American Water Works Association:
a. ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-12, ‘Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings'.
b. ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-17, ‘Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings'.
c. ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15-11, ‘Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron
Threaded Flanges'.
d. ANSI/AWWA C116/A21.16-15, ‘Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior
and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service'.
e. ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50-14, ‘Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe'.
f. ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51-17, ‘Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water'.
g. ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53-11, ‘Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service'.
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. AWWA M41, ‘Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings' (3rd Edition).
3. ASTM International:
a. ASTM A74-17, ‘Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings'.
b. ASTM A888-18a, ‘Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications'.
c. ASTM C564-14, ‘Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings'.
d. ASTM D2235-04(2016), ‘Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-
Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings'.
e. ASTM D2321-18, ‘Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications'.
f. ASTM D2564-12(2018), ‘Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems'.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Facility Sanitary Sewers - 2 - 22 1313
g. ASTM D3034–16, ‘Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings'.
h. ASTM F628–12, ‘Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule
40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe With a Cellular Core'.
i. ASTM F656–15, ‘Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings'.
j. ASTM F891–16, ‘Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe With a Cellular Core'.
4. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute:
a. CISPI Standard 301-09, ‘Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe End Fittings
for Sanitary & Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications'.
b. CISPI 310-11, 'Standard Specification for Couplings for use in connection with Hubless Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications.
c. CISPI Handbook. 'Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook' (2006).
5. International Code Council:
a. ICC IPC-2018, 'International Plumbing Code'.
b. 2017 Idaho Plumbing Code
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. American Brass & Iron (AB&I), Oakland, CA www.abifoundry.com.
b. Clamp-All Corp, Haverhill, MA www.clampall.com.
c. Anaco-Husky, Corona, CA www.anaco-husky.com.
d. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.josam.com.
e. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.jrsmith.com.
f. MG Piping Products Co, Stanton, CA www.mgcoupling.com.
g. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Chicago, IL www.mifab.com.
h. Mission Rubber Co., Corona, CA www.missionrubber.com.
i. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com.
j. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.watts.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON, Canada
www.wattscda.com.
k. Zurn Cast Metals, Erie, PA or Zurn Industries Limited, Mississauga, ON www.zurn.com.
B. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Minimum size of waste piping installed under floor slab on grade shall be 2 inches (50 mm).
b. Meet requirements of CAN/CSA-B70 for cast iron piping systems and CAN/CSA-B182.1 for
plastic piping systems.
C. Materials:
1. Piping And Fittings: PVC Schedule 40 cellular core plastic pipe and pipe fittings meeting
requirements of ASTM F891, joined using cement primer meeting requirements of ASTM F656
and pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2564.
a. Furnish wall cleanouts with chrome wall cover and screw.
2. Piping And Fittings: ABS Schedule 40 cellular core plastic pipe and pipe fittings meeting
requirements of ASTM F628, joined with pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2235.
a. Furnish wall cleanouts with chrome wall cover and screw.
3. Fittings:
a. P-Traps:
1) Trap shall have clean out plug if installed in other than slab on grade.
2) Type Two Acceptable Products.
a) JR Smith: 7220 deep seal cast iron.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Facility Sanitary Sewers - 3 - 22 1313
b) Mifab: MI-950.
c) Zurn: Zurn Z-1000.
d) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
4. Cleanouts:
a. Furnish wall cleanouts with chrome wall cover and screw.
b. Type Two Acceptable Products:
1) Finish Floors:
a) Josam: 56010.
b) J. R. Smith: 4023.
c) Mifab: C1100C-R-1.
d) Wade: W-6000.
e) Watts: CO-200-R.
f) Zurn: Z-1402.
2) Resilient Flooring:
a) Josam: 56010-12.
b) J. R. Smith: 4140.
c) Mifab: C1100C-T-1.
d) Wade: W-6000-T.
e) Watts: CO-200-T.
f) Zurn: Z-1400.
3) Finished Wall:
a) Josam: 58790.
b) J. R. Smith: 4530.
c) Mifab: C1460RD.
d) Wade: W8560E.
e) Watts: CO-460-RD.
f) Zurn: Z-1446.
4) Exposed Drain Lines:
a) Josam: 58910.
b) J. R. Smith: 4510.
c) Mifab: C1460.
d) Wade: W8560B.
e) Watts: CO-460.
f) Zurn: Z-1440.
5) General Purpose:
a) Josam: 58900.
b) J. R. Smith: 4400.
c) Mifab: C1300-MF
d) Wade: W8550E.
e) Watts: CO-380.
f) Zurn: Z-1440.
6) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional
requirements:
1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings.
2. Excavate to required depth and grade to obtain fall required. Grade soil and waste lines within
building perimeter 1/4 inch (6 mm) fall in one foot (300 mm) in direction of flow.
3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required.
4. Remove debris from trench before laying of pipe.
5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect.
B. Thermoplastic Pipe And Fittings:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Facility Sanitary Sewers - 4 - 22 1313
1. General: Piping and joints shall be clean and installed according to Manufacturer's
recommendations. Break down contaminated joints, clean seats and gaskets and reinstall.
2. Above Grade: Locate pipe hangers every 4 feet (1.2 m) on center maximum and at elbows.
3. Below Grade:
a. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2321.
b. Stabilize unstable trench bottoms.
c. Bed pipe true to line and grade with continuous support from firm base.
1) Bedding depth: 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm).
2) Material and compaction to meet ASTM standard noted above.
d. Excavate bell holes into bedding material so pipe is uniformly supported along its entire
length. Blocking to grade pipe is forbidden.
e. Trench width at top of pipe:
1) Minimum: 18 inches (450 mm) or diameter of pipe plus 12 inches (300 mm), whichever
is greater.
2) Maximum: Outside diameter of pipe plus 24 inches (600 mm).
f. Initial backfill shall be 12 inches (300 mm) above top of pipe with material specified in
referenced ASTM standard.
g. Minimum cover over top of pipe not under building slab:
1) 36 inches (900 mm) before wheel loading.
2) 48 inches (1 200 mm) before compaction.
C. Install piping so cleanouts may be installed as follows:
1. Where shown on Drawings and near bottom of each stack and riser.
2. At every 135 degrees of accumulative change in direction for horizontal lines.
3. Every 100 feet (30 meters) of horizontal run.
4. Extend piping to accessible surface. Do not install piping so cleanouts must be installed in
carpeted floors. In such locations, configure piping so wall type cleanouts may be used.
D. Each fixture and appliance discharging water into sanitary sewer or building sewer lines shall have
seal trap in connection with complete venting system so gasses pass freely to atmosphere with no
pressure or siphon condition on water seal.
E. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Join lines together in fewest practicable numbers before
projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley. Vent line
terminations shall be:
1. 6 inches (150 mm) minimum above roof and 12 inches (300 mm) minimum from any vertical
surface.
2. Same size as vent pipe.
3. In areas where minimum design temperature is below 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or where frost or
snow closure may be possible:
a. Vent line terminations shall be same size as vent pipe, except no smaller than 2 inches (50
mm) in diameter.
b. Vents shall terminate 10 inches (250 mm) minimum above roof or higher if required by local
codes.
F. Furnish and install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated structures as required under Sections 07
8400 and 22 0501.
G. If test Tees are used for testing, plug Tees so wall finish can be installed. Do not leave as exposed
cleanouts.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests:
1. Conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect before testing.
2. Thermoplastic Pipe System:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Facility Sanitary Sewers - 5 - 22 1313
a. Before backfilling and compacting of trenches, Fill waste and vent system with water to roof
level or 10 feet (3 meters) minimum, and show no leaks for two hours. Correct leaks and
defective work.
b. After backfilling and compacting of trenches is complete but before placing floor slab, re-test
as specified above. Uncover pipe and correct leaks and defective work. Re -backfill and
compact and re-test.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Facility Sanitary Sewer Specialties - 1 - 22 1319
SECTION 22 1319
FACILITY SANITARY SEWER SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under this Section as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 3013: 'Ceramic Tile' for floor drains in ceramic tile floors.
2. Section 22 0501: 'Common Plumbing Requirements'.
3. Section 22 1119: 'Domestic Water Piping Specialties'.
4. Section 22 1313: ‘Facility Sanitary Sewers’ for installation of miscellaneous sanitary sewer
specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.josam.com.
b. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.jrsmith.com.
c. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Chicago, IL www.mifab.com.
d. Proset Systems, Lawrenceville, GA www.prosetsystems.com.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co, Peculiar, MO www.siouxchief.com.
f. Sureseal Manufacturing, Tacoma WA www.thesureseal.com.
1) Contact Information:
a) All Areas except Idaho and Utah: Rick Ensley (253) 564-0624,
rick@thesureseal.com.
b) Idaho and Utah Areas: Mark Evans, phone (801) 748-1222,
mark@franklinjames.com.
g. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com.
h. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.watts.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON, Canada
www.wattscda.com.
i. Zurn Industries, LLC, Erie PA www.zurn.com. or Zurn Industries Ltd, Mississuaga, ON
(905) 795-8844.
B. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. All materials NOT required to be low lead compliant.
C. Components:
1. Drains And Drain Accessories:
a. Floor Drain FD-1:
1) Approved types with deep seal trap and chrome plated strainer.
2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) Josam: 30000-50-Z-5A.
b) J. R. Smith: 2010-A.
c) Mifab: F-1100-C.
d) Sioux Chief: 832.
e) Wade: 1100.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Facility Sanitary Sewer Specialties - 2 - 22 1319
f) Watts: FD-200-A.
g) Zurn: Z-415.
PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Water Closet - 1 - 22 4213
SECTION 22 4213
COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 9213: 'Elastomeric Joint Sealants' for sealants used between fixtures and other
substrates.
2. Section 22 0501: 'Common Plumbing Requirements'.
3. Section 22 1116: 'Domestic Water Piping'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. High-Efficiency Toilet (HET): Toilets with effective flush volume of 1.28 gallons (4.8 liters) or less.
2. Maximum Performance (MaP): Toilet testing that rates toilet efficiency and flush performance by
measuring number of grams of solid waste (soybean paste and toilet paper) that a toilet can flush
and remove completely from fixture in single flush represented as a scale or score. 1000 grams
is highest score possible (www.map-testing.com).
B. Reference Standards:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers / CSA Group (Canadian Standards Association):
a. ASME A112.19.2-2018/CSA B45.1-18, 'Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures'.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1) Sensor Operated operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. American Standard Brands, Piscataway, NJ www.americanstandard-us.com or American
Standard Canada, Mississauga, ON www.americanstandard.ca.
b. AMTC - Advanced Modern Technologies Corp, Woodland Hills, CA
www.amtcorporation.com.
c. Bemis Manufacturing Co, Sheboygan Falls, WI www.bemismfg.com.
d. Beneke by Sanderson Plumbing Products, Columbus, MS www.sppi.com.
e. Church Seat Co, Sheboygan Falls WI www.churchseats.com.
f. Delany Flush Valves, Charlottesville, VA www.delanyproduct.com.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Water Closet - 2 - 22 4213
g. Delta Faucet Co, Indianapolis, IN www.deltafaucet.com or Delta Faucet Canada, London,
ON (519) 659-3626.
h. Dearborn Brass, Cleveland, OH www.dearbornbrass.com.
i. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC, Woodridge, IL www.gerberonline.com.
j. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.josam.com.
k. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co, Montgomery, AL www.jrsmith.com.
l. Kohler Co Plumbing Div, Kohler, WI www.us.kohler.com.
m. McGuire Manufacturing Co, Cheshire, CT www.mcguiremfg.com.
n. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Amherst, NY www.mifab.com.
o. Moen Incorporated, North Olmsted, OH, or Moen Canada, Oakville, ON www.moen.com.
p. Olsonite Corp, Newnan, GA www.olsonite.net or Olsonite Co Ltd, Tilbury, ON (519) 682-
1240.
q. Sloan Valve Co, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com.
r. South Fork Manufacturing, Coalville, UT (801) 953-3001 www.dirt-grabber.com.
s. Toto U.S.A., Inc., Morrow, GA www.totousa.com
t. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com.
u. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.wattsdrainage.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON,
Canada www.wattscda.com.
v. Zurn Industries, LLC, Erie PA www.zurn.com. or Zurn Industries Ltd, Mississuaga, ON
(905) 795-8844.
B. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Meet or exceed ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
b. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim, including trim behind custom casework doors,
shall be chrome plated.
c. All materials NOT required to be low lead compliant.
d. Do not use toilets with effective flush volume of less than 1.28 gallons (4.8 liters).
C. Materials:
1. Water Closets:
a. To be provided by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with separate vent line. Do not circuit vent.
B. Ensure provisions are made for proper support of fixtures and t hat rough-in piping is accurately set
and protected from movement and damage.
1. Seal wall-mounted fixtures around edges to wall with sealant specified in Section 07 9213
'Elastomeric Joint Sealants'.
2. Attach wall-hung fixtures to carriers.
3. Support fixture hanger or arm free of finished wall.
C. Adjust flush valves for proper flow.
D. Provide each individual fixture supply with accessible chrome-plated stop valve with hand wheel.
E. Urinals: Install with accessible stop or control valve in each branch supply line.
F. Water Closets:
1. Floor or Wall Fixtures:
a. Make fixture connections with approved brand of cast iron flange, soldered or caulked
securely to waste pipe. Make joints between fixtures and flanges tight with approved fixture
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Water Closet - 3 - 22 4213
setting compound or gaskets. Caulk between fixtures with sealant specified in Section 07
9213. Point edges.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Lavatories - 1 - 22 4216
SECTION 22 4216
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 9213: 'Elastomeric Joint Sealants' for sealants used between fixtures and other substrates.
2. Section 22 0501: 'Common Plumbing Requirements'.
3. Section 22 1116: 'Domestic Water Piping'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standard:
1. American National Standards Institute / International Code Council:
a. ANSI/ICC A117.1-2017, 'Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities'.
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers / Canadian Standards Association (CSA Group):
a. ASME A112.18.1-2018/CSA B125.1-18, ‘Plumbing Supply Fittings’.
b. ASME A112.6.7-2010 (R2015), ‘Sanitary Floor Sinks’.
c. ASME A112.19.1-2018/CSA B45.2-18, 'Enamelled Cast Iron and Enamelled Steel Plumbing
Fixtures’.
d. ASME A112.19.3-2017/CSA B45.4-17, ‘Stainless steel plumbing fixtures’.
3. NSF International Standard / American National Standards Institute:
a. NSF/ANSI 61-2017, 'Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects'.
b. NSF/ANSI 372-2016, 'Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content'.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Meet NSF International Standards for materials or products that come into contact with drinking water,
drinking water treatment chemicals, or both for chemical contaminants and impurities that are indirectly
imparted to drinking water from products, components, and materials used in drinking water systems.
2. California only: California Assembly Bill 1953 (AB1953) Compliant for Lead Free.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Warranty Documentation:
1) Final, executed copy of Warranty.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Manufacturer's standard Warranty against material or Manufacturing defects.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Lavatories - 2 - 22 4216
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. American Standard Brands, Piscataway, NJ www.americanstandard-us.com or American Standard
Canada, Mississauga, ON www.americanstandard.ca.
b. Brocar Products Inc, Cincinnati, OH www.brocar.com.
c. CECO, Huntington Park, CA www.cecosinks.com.
d. Chicago Faucet Co, Des Plaines, IL www.chicagofaucets.com.
e. Dearborn Brass, Tyler, TX www.dearbornbrass.com.
f. Delta Faucet Co, Indianapolis, IN www.deltafaucet.com or Delta Faucet Canada, London, ON
(519) 659-3626.
g. Engineered Brass Co. (EBC) (Just Manufacturing Co.), Franklin Park, IL www.justmfg.com.
h. Elkay Manufacturing Co, Oak Brook, IL www.elkay.com.
i. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC, Woodridge, IL www.gerberonline.com.
j. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.josam.com.
k. Jay R. Smith Maufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.jrsmith.com.
l. Just Manufacturing Co, Franklin Park, IL www.justsinks.com.
m. Keeney Manufacturing Co, Newington, CT www.keeneymfg.com.
n. Kindred USA, Midland, ON www.kindred-sinkware.com.
o. Kohler Co Plumbing Div, Kohler, WI www.us.kohler.com.
p. McGuire Manufacturing Co, Cheshire, CT www.mcguiremfg.com.
q. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Amherst, NY www.mifab.com.
r. Moen Incorporated, North Olmsted, OH, or Moen Canada, Oakville, ON www.moen.com.
s. Omni Flow Controls, Harbor City, CA www.chronomite.com or www.omniflowcontrols.com.
t. Plumberex Specialty Products, Palm Springs, CA www.plumberex.com.
u. Sloan Valve Co, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com.
v. Speakman Company, New Castle, DE www.speakmancompany.com.
w. Symmons, Braintree, MA www.symmons.com.
x. T & S Brass & Bronze Works Inc, Travelers Rest, SC www.tsbrass.com.
y. TrueBro Inc, Collierville, TN www.truebro.com.
z. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com.
aa. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.wattsdrainage.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON,
Canada www.wattscda.com.
bb. Zurn Commercial Brass, Sanford, NC www.zurn.com or Zurn Industries Ltd, Mississuaga, ON
(905) 795-8844.
cc. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA www.zurn.com.
B. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim, including trim behind custom casework doors, shall
be chrome plated.
b. Faucets and other fixture fittings shall conform to requirements of ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
c. Floor Sinks (Sanitary) shall conform to requirements of ASME A112.6.7.
d. Lavatories shall conform to requirements of:
1) Enamelled cast iron and enamelled steel fixtures.
a) ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2.
b) CSA B45.2/ASME A112.19.1.
2) Stainless steel plumbing fixtures:
a) ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4.
b) CSA B45.4/ASME A112.19.3.
C. Components:
1. Lavatories And Fittings:
a. Standard and Handicap Accessible Self Supporting Lavatories:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Lavatories - 3 - 22 4216
1) Size: 20 by 18 inches (500 by 450 mm) nominal.
2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) American Standard: Lucern 0355.012.
b) Kohler: Greenwich K-2032.
3) Carrier / Support:
a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
(1) Josam: 17100.
(2) Jay R. Smith: 0700.
(3) Mifab: MC-41.
(4) Wade: 520-M36.
b. Lavatory Fittings:
1) Faucet and Grid Strainer For Handicap Accessible Sinks:
a) Design Criteria:
(1) Meet NSF International Standards for Lead Free.
b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
(1) American Standard: Monterrey Two-Handle Centerset Lavatory Faucet with
Vandal-Resistant Wrist Blade handles and grid strainer drain 5502.170.
(2) Chicago: 802-317CP with K7715 strainer.
(3) Delta: 2529HDF.
(4) Gerber: CO-44-412.
(5) Kohler: K-7404-5A with K-13885 strainer.
(6) Moen: 8215 with14750 grid strainer.
(7) Speakman: SC 3074.
(8) T & S: B-0890 with B-0899 Grid Strainer.
(9) Zurn: Z-81104 with McGuire 155A grid strainer.
2) Faucet and Drain:
a) Design Criteria:
(1) Faucet: Meet NSF International Standards for Lead Free.
(2) Drain: Not required to meet NSF International Standards for Lead Free.
b) Accessories:
(1) Cast brass spout.
(3) Hard-wired automatic faucet.
(4) Cast brass spout with chrome finish.
(5) 4 inches (100 mm) cover plate.
(6) Mechanical mixing valve.
(7) Solenoid valve.
(8) Control module and transformer.
(9) Hermetically sealed electronics.
(10) Inlet checks and strainer.
c) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
(1) Chicago: 116.308.21.1 with 4” CC E-tronic and 327A strainer.
(2) Delta: 591T0250 WITH 33T260 grid strainer and R2900 mixing valve.
(3) Gerber: 44-801-4 with 43-970 grid strainer.
(4) Moen: 8306 with McGuire 155A grid strainer.
(5) Speakman: S-8811 with S-3440 grid drain.
(6) Symmons: S6080-AC-G with checks and mixing valve.
(7) Zurn: Z6913-CWB with grid strainer.
3) Flow Control Fitting:
a) Design Criteria:
(1) Meet NSF International Standards for Lead Free.
b) Accessories:
(1) Provide vandal-proof type in place of aerator. Flow shall be 0.5 gpm.
c) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
(1) Omni L-200 Series by Chronomite Laboratories.
4) Supply pipes with stops:
a) Design Criteria:
(1) Meet NSF International Standards for Lead Free.
b) Accessories:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Commercial Lavatories - 4 - 22 4216
(1) Provide chrome plated quarter-turn brass ball valve, 12 inches (305 mm) long
braided stainless steel riser, and chrome-plated steel flange.
c) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
(1) McGuire: BV2165CC.
(2) Zurn: Z8804 LRQ-PC.
5) Trap:
a) Description:
(1) 17 gauge (1.4 mm) tube 'P' trap, chrome plated.
b) Design Criteria:
(1) Not required to meet NSF International Standards for Lead Free.
c) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
(1) Dearborn.
(2) Engineered Brass Company (EBC).
(3) Keeney Manufacturing.
(4) McGuire.
(5) Zurn.
6) Safety Covers for Handicap Accessible Lavatories:
a) Description:
(1) Provide protection on water supply pipes and on trap.
b) Design Criteria:
(1) Not required to meet NSF International Standards for Lead Free.
c) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
(1) Trapwrap by Brocar Products Inc.
(2) Pro Wrap by McGuire Products.
(3) Lav Guard 2 by TrueBro.
(4) Pro Extreme by Plumberex.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with separate vent line. Do not circuit vent.
B. Ensure provisions are made for proper support of fixtures and that rough-in piping is accurately set and
protected from movement and damage.
C. Seal wall-mounted fixtures around edges to wall and counter top fixtures to countertop with sealant specified
in Section 07 9213.
D. Unless otherwise noted, provide each individual fixture supply with chrome-plated stop valve with hand
wheel.
E. Install fixtures with accessible stop or control valve in each hot and cold water branch supply line.
F. Self-Supporting Lavatories: Install using carriers. Support carrier free of finished wall.
G. Install Safety Covers on all under sink / lavatories with exposed water supply pipes and traps.
H. Install Handicap Accessible Lavatories as per ADA height mounting requirements.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.
END OF SECTION
END OF DIVISION 22
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Table of Contents - 1 - Document 23 0000
D I V I S I O N 23: H E A T I N G, V E N T I L A T I N G, A N D
A I R - C O N D I T I O N I N G
23 0500 C O M M O N W O R K R E S U L T S F O R H V A C
23 0501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS
23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 3000 H V A C A I R D I S T R I B U T I O N
23 3001 COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS
23 3114 LOW-PRESSURE METAL DUCTS
23 3401 EXHAUST FANS
23 8000 D E C E N T R A L I Z E D H V A C E Q U I P M E N T
23 8333 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
B L A N K P A G E
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common HVAC Requirements - 1 - 23 0501
SECTION 23 0501
COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Common requirements and procedures for HVAC systems.
2. Responsibility for proper operation of electrically powered equipment furnished under this
Division.
3. Furnish and install sealants relating to installation of systems installed under this Division.
4. Furnish and install Firestop Penetration Systems for HVAC system penetrations as described in
Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 8400: 'Firestopping' for quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project
and submittal requirements.
2. Section 07 9213: 'Elastometric Joint Sealant' for quality of sealants used at building exterior.
3. Section 07 9219: 'Acoustical Joint Sealants' for quality of acoustical sealants.
4. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in
their respective materials.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item.
1) Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include Manufacturer's
catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to show compliance
with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show capacities and size of
equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data
underlined.
2) Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Schematic control diagrams for each separate fan system, heating system, control panel,
etc. Each diagram shall show locations of all control a nd operational components and
devices. Mark correct operating settings for each control device on these diagrams.
b. Diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items such
as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. Include drawings showing
electrical power requirements and connection locations.
c. Drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components in panels and their
function.
d. Other shop drawings required by Division 23 trade Sections.
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Operations and Maintenance Data (Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7800):
1) At beginning of HVAC section of Operations And Maintenance Manual, provide master
index showing items included.
a) Provide name, address, and phone number of Architect, Architect's Mechanical
Engineer, General Contractor, and HVAC, Sheet Metal, Refrigeration, and
Temperature Control subcontractors.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common HVAC Requirements - 2 - 23 0501
b) Identify maintenance instructions by using same equipment identification used in
Contract Drawings. Maintenance instructions shall include:
(1) List of HVAC equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and
nameplate data of each item together with number and name associated with
each system item.
(2) Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of HVAC equipment
installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation
instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of equipment, and
maintenance and lubrication instructions.
(3) Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of
equipment, location, and type and frequency of lubrication.
(4) Manual for Honeywell T7350 thermostat published by Honeywell.
b. Warranty Documentation:
1) Include copies of warranties required in individual Sections of Division 23.
c. Record Documentation:
1) Manufacturers documentation:
a) Copies of approved shop drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of Gas Ordinances applicable to Project.
Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances.
2. In case of differences between building codes, laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations,
and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Notify Architect in writing of such
differences before performing work affected by such differences.
3. Identification:
a. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL / ULC and AGA / CGA labels
shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner.
B. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following:
1. Company:
a. Company specializing in performing work of this section.
1) Minimum five (5) years experience in HVAC installations.
2) Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations in past three (3) years of projects
similar in size, scope, and complexity required for this project before bidding.
b. Upon request, submit documentation.
2. Installer:
a. Licensed for area of Project.
b. Designate one (1) individual as project foremen who shall be on site at all times during
installation and experienced with installation procedures required f or this project.
c. Upon request, submit documentation.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01:
a. Stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by Architect until installed.
b. Store items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, in dry, heated spaces.
c. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
d. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
2. Protect bearings during installation. Thoroughly grease steel shafts to prevent corrosion.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common HVAC Requirements - 3 - 23 0501
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:
1. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment made out in favor of Owner. Clearly
record 'start-up' date of each piece of equipment on certificate.
B. Special Warranty:
1. Guarantee HVAC systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from fa ilure to
construct system in accordance with Contract Documents.
2. If HVAC sub-contractor with offices located more than 150 miles (240 km) from Project site is
used, provide service / warranty work agreement for warranty period with local HVAC sub-
contractor approved by Architect. Include copy of service / warranty agreement in warranty
section of Operation And Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Components shall bear Manufacturer's name and trade name. Equipment and materials of same
general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform appearance, operation, and
maintenance.
B. Pipe And Pipe Fittings:
1. Use domestic made pipe and pipe fittings on Project.
2. Weld-O-Let and Screw-O-Let fittings are acceptable.
C. Sleeves:
1. In Framing: Standard weight galvanized iron pipe, Schedule 40 PVC, or 14 ga (2 mm) galvanized
sheet metal two sizes larger than bare pipe or insulation on insulated pipe.
2. In Concrete And Masonry: Sleeves through outside walls, interior shear walls, and footings shall
be schedule 80 black steel pipe with welded plate.
D. Valves:
1. Valves of same type shall be of same manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. Acceptable Installers:
1. Meet Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Drawings:
1. HVAC Drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Follow as
closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit.
2. Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these drawin gs furnish
information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over
HVAC Drawings.
3. Because of small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work
and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet
conditions.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common HVAC Requirements - 4 - 23 0501
B. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Examine premises to understand conditions that may affect performance of work of this Division
before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is
dependent for efficiency and report work that requires correction.
2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to
failure to examine site conditions.
3. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to
ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and i nstall equipment of
size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. If
approval is received by Addendum or Change Order to use other than originally specified items,
be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space
available.
4. Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and
roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordina te with
Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Changes Due To Equipment Selection:
1. Where equipment specified or otherwise approved requires different arrangement or connections
from that shown in Contract Documents, submit drawings, if requested by Architect, showing
proposed installations.
2. If proposed changes are approved, install equipment to operate properly and in harmony with
intent of Contract Documents. Make incidental changes in piping, ductwork, supports,
installation, wiring, heaters, panelboards, and as otherwise necessary.
3. Provide any additional motors, valves, controllers, fittings, and other additional equipment
required for proper operation of system resulting from selection of equipment.
4. Be responsible for the proper location of roughing-in and connections provided under other
Divisions.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in sufficient
time to be incorporated into construction as work proceeds. Locate these items and see they are
properly installed.
2. Electrical: Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor
controls to installer of electrical system.
3. Testing And Balancing:
a. Put HVAC systems into full operation and continue their operation during each working day
of testing and balancing.
b. Make changes in pulleys, belts, fan speeds, and dampers or add dampers as required for
correct balance as recommended by Testing And Balancing Agency and at no additional
cost to Owner.
B. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to previously installed or existing work. Do not cut
beams, columns, or trusses.
C. Locating Equipment:
1. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, unions, traps,
filters, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels.
2. Adjust locations of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, and equipment to accommodate work to
interferences anticipated and encountered.
3. Install HVAC work to permit removal of equipment and parts of equipment requiring periodic
replacement or maintenance without damage to or interference with other parts of equipment or
structure.
4. Determine exact route and location of each pipe and duct before fabrication.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common HVAC Requirements - 5 - 23 0501
a. Right-Of-Way:
1) Lines that pitch shall have right-of-way over those that do not pitch. For example,
steam, steam condensate, and drains shall normally have right-of-way.
2) Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose
elevations can be changed.
b. Offsets, Transitions, and Changes in Direction:
1) Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes and ducts as required to
maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on
Drawings.
2) Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and devices as required to effect
these offsets, transitions, and changes in direction.
D. Penetration Firestops: Install Penetration Firestop System appro priate for penetration at HVAC
system penetrations through walls, ceilings, roofs, and top plates of walls.
E. Sealants:
1. Seal openings through building exterior caused by penetrations of elements of HVAC systems.
2. Furnish and install acoustical sealant to seal penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and
ceilings.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION
A. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work
of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it.
1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance
as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown.
2. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests:
1. Perform tests on HVAC piping systems. Furnish devices required for testing purposes.
B. Non-Conforming Work:
1. Replace material or workmanship proven defective with sound material at no additional cost to
Owner.
2. Repeat tests on new material, if requested.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, and equipment.
a. Conduct instruction periods after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are
properly working and before final payment is made. None of these instructional periods shall
overlap another.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the
work, and isolating parts of completed system. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to
keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or
similar materials.
B. Do not operate pieces of equipment used for moving supply air without proper air filters installed
properly in system.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common HVAC Requirements - 6 - 23 0501
C. After start-up, continue necessary lubrication and be responsible for damage to bearings while
equipment is being operated up to Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Identification For HVAC Piping And Equipment - 1 - 23 0553
SECTION 23 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products Furnished But not Installed Under This Section:
1. Identification of HVAC piping and equipment as described in Contract Documents including:
a. Paint identification for gas piping used in HVAC equipment.
b. Stencils and band colors for gas piping used in HVAC equipment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 9124: ‘Interior Painted Metal’ for providing field painting of identification of piping used
with HVAC equipment.
2. Section 22 0529: 'Hangers And Supports For Plumbing’ for field installation of pipe stencils and
band colors for identification for piping used with H VAC equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Materials:
1. Labels:
a. Equipment Identification:
1) Black formica, with white reveal when engraved.
2) Lettering to be 3/16 inch (5 mm) high minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Labels:
1. Identify following items with specified labels fastened to equipment with screws (unless noted
otherwise):
a. Accessible exhaust fans.
2. Engrave following data from Equipment Schedules on Drawings onto labels:
a. Equipment mark.
b. Area served.
c. Panel and breaker from which unit is powered.
B. Painting:
1. New Surfaces:
a. Remove rust spots by sanding and immediately spot prime. If all traces of rust cannot be
removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying full primer
coat.
2. Existing Surfaces:
a. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping and sanding.
Feather edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces. Spot prime
bare metal surfaces immediately.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Identification For HVAC Piping And Equipment - 2 - 23 0553
b. Remove rust spots by sanding and immediately spot prime. If all traces of rust cannot be
removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying full primer
coat.
c. Clean existing sound painted surfaces as well as scraped and sanded existing painted
surfaces as recommended by Paint Manufacturer.
d. Apply prime coat over entire surface to be painted.
e. Lightly sand entire surface.
f. Clean surface as recommended by Paint Manufacturer.
g. Apply finish coats.
3. Leave equipment in like-new appearance.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Duct Requirements - 1 - 23 3001
SECTION 23 3001
COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. General procedures and requirements for ductwork.
2. Repair leaks in ductwork, as identified by duct testing, at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 9219: 'Acoustical Joint Sealants' for quality of acoustic sealant.
2. Section 23 0501: 'Common HVAC Requirements'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. Sheet Metal And Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association / American National
Standards Institute:
a. SMACNA, ‘HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible' (4th Edition).
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule conference immediately before installation of ductwork.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data: Specification data on sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork.
2. Samples: Sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer Instructions:
a. Installation manuals providing detailed instructions on assembly, joint sealing, and system
pressure testing for leaks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLIES
A. Performance:
1. Design Criteria:
a. Standard Ducts: Construction details not specifically called out in Contract Documents shall
conform to applicable requirements of SMACNA, ‘HVAC Duct Construction Standards , Metal
and Flexible'.
B. Materials:
1. Duct Hangers:
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Common Duct Requirements - 2 - 23 3001
a. One inch (25 mm) by 18 ga (1.27 mm) galvanized steel straps or steel rods as shown on
Drawings, and spaced not more than 96 inches (2 400 mm) apart. Do not use wire hangers.
b. Attaching screws at trusses shall be 2 inch (50 mm) No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails
not allowed.
c. Attach threaded rod to steel joist with Anvil Steel washer plate Fig. 60. Double nut
connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. During installation, protect open ends of ducts by covering with plastic sheet tied in place to prevent
entrance of debris and dirt.
B. Make necessary allowances and provisions in installation of sheet metal ducts for structural conditions
of building. Revisions in layout and configuration may be allowed, with prior written approval of
Architect. Maintain required airflows in suggesting revisions.
C. Hangers And Supports:
1. Install pair of hangers as required by spacing indicated in table on Drawings.
2. Install upper ends of hanger securely to floor or roof construction above by method shown on
Drawings.
3. Attach strap hangers to ducts with cadmium-plated screws. Use of pop rivets or other means will
not be accepted.
4. Where hangers are secured to forms before concrete slabs are poured, cut off flush all nails,
strap ends, and other projections after forms are removed.
5. Secure vertical ducts passing through floors by extending bracing angles to rest firmly on floors
without loose blocking or shimming. Support vertical ducts, which do not pass through floors, by
using bands bolted to walls, columns, etc. Size, spacing, and method of attachment to vertical
ducts shall be same as specified for hanger bands on horizontal ducts.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of duct systems before final completion.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Low-Pressure Metal Ducts - 1 - 23 3114
SECTION 23 3114
LOW-PRESSURE METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install above-grade low-pressure steel ducts and related items as described in
Contract Documents.
2. Section 23 3001: 'Common Duct Requirements'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications:
1. Sheet Metal And Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association / American National
Standards Institute:
2. SMACNA, ‘HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible' (4th edition).
B. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM A653/A653M-18, 'Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process'.
b. ASTM E84-18b, ‘Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials'.
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
a. UL 723: ‘Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials';
(11th Edition - 2018).
3. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada:
a. ULC 102-18: ‘Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and
Assemblies' (ULC S102).
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Duct Sealer:
a. Meet Class A flame spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
b. Meet Class A flame spread rating in accordance with ULC-S102.2.
c. Handle, store, and apply materials in compliance with applicable regulations and material
safety data sheets (MSDS).
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Duct Sealer:
a. Handle, store, and apply materials in compliance with applicable regulations and material
safety data sheets (MSDS).
b. Handle to prevent inclusion of foreign matter, damage by water, or breakage.
c. Store in a cool dry location, but never under 35 deg F (1.7 deg C) or subjected to sustained
temperatures exceeding 110 deg F (43 deg C) or as per Manufacturer's written
recommendations.
d. Do use sealants that have exceeded shelf life of product.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Low-Pressure Metal Ducts - 2 - 23 3114
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Duct Sealer:
a. Do not apply under 35 deg F (1.7 deg C) or subjected to sustained temperatures exceeding
110 deg F (43 deg C) or as per Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Do not apply when rain or freezing temperatures will occur within seventy two (72) hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Materials:
1. Sheet Metal:
a. Fabricate ducts, plenum chambers and casings of zinc-coated, lock-forming quality steel
sheets meeting requirements A653/A653M, with G 60 coating.
2. Duct Sealer For Interior Ducts:
a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
1) Duct Butter or ButterTak by Cain Manufacturing Co Inc, Pelham, AL
www.cainmfg.com.
2) DP 1010, DP 1030 or DP 1015 by Design Polymerics, Fountain Valley, CA
www.designpoly.com.
3) PROseal, FIBERseal, EVERseal, or EZ-seal by Ductmate Industries, Inc., Charleroi, PA
www.ductmate.com.
4) SAS by Duro Dyne, Bay Shore, NY or Duro Dyne Canada, Lachine, QB
www.durodyne.com.
5) Iron Grip 601 by Hardcast Inc, Wylie, TX www.hardcast.com.
6) MTS100 or MTS 200 by Hercules Mighty Tough, Denver CO,
www.herculesindustries.com.
7) 15-325 by Miracle / Kingco, Div ITW TACC, Rockland, MA www.taccint.com.
8) 44-39 by Mon-Eco Industries Inc, East Brunswick, NJ www.mon-ecoindustries.com.
9) Airseal Zero by Polymer Adhesive Sealant Systems Inc, Weatherford, TX
www.polymeradhesives.com.
10) Airseal #22 Water Base Duct Sealer by Polymer Adhesive Sealant Systems Inc,
Weatherford, TX www.polymeradhesives.com.
B. Fabrication:
1. General:
a. Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished.
b. Duct drops to diffusers shall be round, square, or rectangular to accommodate diffuser neck.
Drops shall be same gauge as branch duct. Seal joints air tight.
2. Standard Ducts:
a. General:
1) Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside acoustic duct liner. Dimensions
shown on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed.
b. Round Duct:
1) Spiral Seam:
a) 28 ga (0.38 mm) minimum for ducts up to and including 14 inches (355 mm) in
diameter.
2) Longitudinal Seam:
a) 28 ga (0.38 mm) minimum for ducts up to and including 8 inches (200 mm) in
diameter.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Low-Pressure Metal Ducts - 3 - 23 3114
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Metal duct surface must be clean and free of moisture, contamination and foreign matter before
applying duct sealer for interior and exterior ducts.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install internal ends of slip joints in direction of flow. Seal transverse and longitudinal joints air tight
using specified duct sealer as per Manufacturer’s written instructions. Cover horizontal and
longitudinal joints on exterior ducts with two layers of specified tape installed with specified adhesive.
B. Securely anchor ducts and plenums to building structure with specified duct hangers attached with
screws. Do not hang more than one duct from a duct hanger. Brace and install ducts so they shall be
free of vibration under all conditions of operation.
C. Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members.
D. Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black.
E. Properly flash where ducts protrude above roof.
F. Under no conditions will pipes, rods, or wires be allowed to penetrate ducts.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-Conforming Work:
1. Reseal transverse joint duct leaks and seal longitudinal duct j oint leaks discovered during air test
and balance procedures at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Exhaust Fans - 1 - 23 3401
SECTION 23 3401
EXHAUST FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install exhaust fans as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 23 3001: ‘Common Duct Requirements’.
2. Division 26: Control device and electrical connection.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Bear AMCA seal and UL label.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer Contact List:
1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corp, Muskogee, OK www.acmefan.com.
2. Broan-Nu Tone LLC, Harford, WI www.broan.com.
3. Carnes Co., Verona, MI www.carnes.com.
4. Loren Cook Co., Springfield, MO www.lorencook.com.
5. Soler & Palau (S&P USA Ventilation Systems, LLC), Jacksonville FL www.solerpalau-usa.com.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Ceiling Mounted Exhaust Fans:
1. Acoustically insulated housings. Sound level rating of 5.0 sones maximum for CFM and static
pressure listed on Contract Drawings.
2. Include chatterproof integral back-draft damper with no metal-to-metal contact.
3. True centrifugal wheels.
4. Entire fan, motor, and wheel assembly shall be easily removable without disturbing housing.
5. Suitably ground motors and mount on rubber-in shear vibration isolators.
6. Provide wall or roof cap, as required.
7. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a. Acme: VQ.
b. Broan: LoSone.
c. Carnes: VCD.
d. Cook: Gemini.
e. Soler & Palau: FF.
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Exhaust Fans - 2 - 23 3401
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor fan units securely to structure or to curb.
END OF SECTION
511306721010103 May 2022 Rexburg FM Office Restroom
Electric Radiant Heaters - 1 - 23 8333
SECTION 23 8333
ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install wall heaters as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 23 0501: 'Common HVAC Requirements'.
2. Section 23 0933: 'Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC'.
3. Division 26: Electrical service and connections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Units shall be UL listed and comply with NEC.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a. Berko, Marley Electric Co, Bennettsville. SC www.berkomeh.com.
b. QMark, Marley Electric Co, Bennettsville, SC www.qmarkmeh.com.
c. Raywall, Johnson, TN www.raywall.com.
B. Wall Heaters:
1. Surface mounting.
2. Sheet metal casing.
3. Heating element shall be encased in steel finned casting and protected by thermal switch.
4. Fan motor shall be permanently lubricated, and dust protected bearings.
5. Fan shall be vibration free.
6. Units shall be controlled automatically by external thermostat provided as specified in Section 23
0933 'Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC'.
7. UL listed.
8. Open coil element or enclosed in steel casing.
9. Thermal cutout with indicator light and one time thermal fuse.
10. Finish: Baked-on enamel.
11. Design Standard. Q Mark QFG22281F (2.2KW) controller used with these plans can only handle
12.5 amps.
12. Surface mounting, include backbox (Catalog number GFRBB).
PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used
END OF SECTION
END OF DIVISION 23